Lucent Technologies PSAX 1000, PSAX 1250, PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 User Manual

Download

Top of Guide

PacketStar®

PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways User Guide

for the PSAX 1000, PSAX 1250, PSAX 2300, and PSAX 4500

Issue 1, December 2004 System Software Release 10.0.0

Doc. No.: 255-700-686R10.0.0

For trademark, regulatory compliance, and related legal information, see the "Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information" section.

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory

Copyright

Trademarks

Information

This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the express written consent of the originating organization and the business management owner of the material.

PacketStar, Navis, Lucent, Lucent Technologies, and the Lucent Technologies logo are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the USA. Other product and brand names mentioned in this guide are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Notices

The information in this document is for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Lucent Technologies, Inc. This document is without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied. Lucent Technologies, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors, inaccuracies, or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information or instructions contained herein. Lucent Technologies, Inc. is not responsible for any damage or loss to your data or equipment resulting either directly or indirectly from use of this document.

Warranty Information

Lucent Technologies provides a 90-day limited software warranty, and a oneyear limited hardware warranty on this product. Refer to the Software License

and Limited Warranty Agreement and the Lucent Technologies InterNetworking Systems Global Warranty that accompanied your package for more information.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 iii

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information

Regulatory Standards Compliance

The PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways are compliant with a number of safety, electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and telecommunications standards. The applicable standards for each system are described in the indicated PSAX installation guide:

• PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway, model 10S00,refer to the

PacketStar

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway Installation Guide

• PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway, models 20S00 (19 in. chassis

with AC or DC power) and 20S10 (23 in. chassis with DC power), refer to the PacketStar

• PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway, model 23S00, refer to the

PacketStar

• PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway, model 45S00, refer to the

PacketStar

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway Installation Guide

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway Installation Guide

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway Installation Guide

Safety Information

When installing and operating the PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways, follow the safety guidelines provided in the printed Packet-

PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway Safety Guidelines, which accompanies

Star

this product to help prevent serious personal injury and damage to the PSAX equipment. Please read all warnings and instructions supplied before beginning installation or configuration of the PSAX equipment. In addition to the general safety information provided, you should also refer to this guide for other important safety information and procedures.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue1 Release10.0.0

iv 255-700-686R10.0.0

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Regulatory Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi

1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Purpose of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Audience for This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

What You Should Know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Related Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Product Information Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Printed Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Other Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Text Types Used in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Icons and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Command Description Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Field Description Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Selecting Options, Fields, and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Help Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

About Lucent Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

For More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

iii

xxiii

xxxi

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

1-5

1-7

1-8

iii

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 v

Table of Contents

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Comments on This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

2 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

System Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chassis Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Module Slot Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Midplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Blank Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Chassis Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

System Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Chassis Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Module Slot Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Chassis Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

System Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Chassis Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Module Slot Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Chassis Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

System Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Chassis Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Module Slot Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Midplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Chassis Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Common Equipment Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

1-8

1-9

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-5

2-7

2-8

2-9

2-10

2-12

2-13

2-14

2-15

2-16

2-17

2-18

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

vi 255-700-686R10.0.0

Table of Contents

PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

-48 V dc Power Supply Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

110/220 V ac Power Supply Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

24 V dc Power Supply Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Chassis Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Timing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Line Timing Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Redundant System Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Timing Source Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Chassis Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Trap Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

PSAX 1250 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

PSAX 1250 -48 V dc Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

PSAX 1250 110 V ac Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

PSAX 1250 220 V ac Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

PSAX 2300/PSAX 4500 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Functional Desciption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

PSAX 2300/4500 -48 V dc Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

PSAX 1250 Stratum 3–4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

PSAX 1250 Stratum 3–4 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

PSAX 4500 Stratum 3–4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Physical Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Timing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

System Control and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Midplane Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

System Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

PSAX 1000 CPU3 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

PSAX 1000 CPU3 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

PSAX CPU4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

PSAX CPU4 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

PSAX Alarm Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

2-18

2-19

2-20

2-21

2-22

2-23

2-24

2-25

2-26

2-27

2-28

2-29

2-30

2-31

2-32

2-33

2-35

2-36

2-37

2-38

2-39

2-40

2-41

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 vii

Table of Contents

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Generating Central Office Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Alarm Relay Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Audible Alarm Cutoff (ACO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Monitoring and Reporting on External Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Control Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Remote Status Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Optimizing I/O and Server Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

PSAX 1000 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

I/O and Server Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

6-Port Multiserial Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

PSAX 4500 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Module Performance and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

3 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

System Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

User Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Feature Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Interface Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Connections Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Soft Permanent Virtual Circuit (SPVC) Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

SPVC Reconnection Priority Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Modification of Parameters for Active SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

SPVC Auto-restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC) Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

SVC Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Call States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Circuit Emulation Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

SPVC Support for CES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Circuit Emulation Service for the 6-Port Multiserial Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Emulation Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Dynamic CAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

DS1 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

DS3 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

HDLC Passthrough Bit Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Interim Interswitch Signaling Protocol (IISP) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

2-42

2-44

2-45

2-47

2-50

2-51

2-52

2-53

2-54

2-55

3-1

3-3

3-4

3-6

3-7

3-9

3-10

3-11

3-12

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

viii 255-700-686R10.0.0

Table of Contents

Private Network-Network Interface (PNNI) 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

PNNI Features Supported by the PSAX Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

PNNI Peer Group Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

PNNI Topology State Element (PTSE) Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

PNNI Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

ATM Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Path and Connection Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

ILMI over PNNI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Load Balancing for IISP and PNNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

ATM Terminal Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

ATM UNI 4.0 Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Automatic Use of IMA Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

IMA Configuration Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Frame Relay-to-ATM Interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

FRF.5 Encapsulating Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

FRF.8 Converting Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Inverse Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Frame Relay-to-Frame Relay Interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

GR-303 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Fax/Modem Master/Slave Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

CAS Refresh Rates in the On-Hook State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Idle Channel Suppression Support for the CellPipe IAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

GR-303 Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Network Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Navis

EMS-PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

PSAX System Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Bulk Statistics Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Connection Gateway API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Connection Gateway API Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

PSAX System As a TCP Client/Server for the Connection Gateway API . . . . . . . 3-30

Fractional PRI Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

PNNI Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

DS1 ANI In-line Codes for Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

DS0A Non-Latched Loop Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3-12

3-13

3-14

3-15

3-16

3-17

3-18

3-19

3-21

3-22

3-23

3-24

3-26

3-27

3-28

3-29

3-30

3-31

3-32

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 ix

Table of Contents

PSAX System Traffic Protection Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

N:1 Traffic Protection with the PSAX 4500 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

1:1 Traffic Protection with the PSAX 1000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

1:1 Traffic Protection with the PSAX 24-Port RJ Protection Patch Panel . . . . . . . 3-40

APS/MSP Protection on the Optical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Line Defect Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Interface Protection Group with ATM Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Alternate Rerouting Using DHPVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Firmware Release Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Forward Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

H.248 Media Gateway Access Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Interface and Connection Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Internet Protocol (IP) Throttling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

LANET Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Overview of OAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

OAM Cell Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

OAM ATM Layer Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

OAM F4 Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

OAM F5 Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

PSAX Modules Supporting OAM Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

ATM Layer OAM Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60

PacketPipe AAL5-to-AAL2 Wireless Trunking for Mobile Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

SNMP Trap Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Traffic Management Using the AQueMan Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

ATM Traffic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64

Guaranteed Frame Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64

Usage Parameter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65

UPC Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65

Early Packet Discard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Adjustable Queue Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

ATM Traffic Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Overview of ATM Traffic Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Configuring ATM Traffic Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

Task Summary for Implementing ATM Traffic Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

ATM Traffic Shaping Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

ATM Traffic Shaping for CBR and VBR-rt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Maximum Number of ATM Traffic-Shaped Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Connection Egress Priority on PSAX Modules Supporting ATM Traffic Shaping . 3-69

ATM Traffic Shaping Capabilities by PSAX Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

3-33

3-37

3-40

3-43

3-44

3-46

3-47

3-48

3-50

3-52

3-54

3-55

3-57

3-58

3-59

3-60

3-62

3-63

3-64

3-65

3-66

3-67

3-68

3-69

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

x 255-700-686R10.0.0

Table of Contents

Virtual Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71

PSAX Modules Supporting Virtual Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72

Configuration Compatibility for ATM Traffic Shaping, UPC, and VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72

Voice Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73

V5.2 European IDLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74

Overview of the V5.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74

Primary Rate Access (PRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74

Increased Call Capacity for ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74

Hardware Dependency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

Voice Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

Echo Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

Wireless Mobile Voice Backhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

Virtual Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77

Secure Telephone Unit Third Generation (STU-III) Secure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

Voice Path Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

GSM Voice Traffic Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81

DSP Resource Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81

System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

Optimized Bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

Non-Service-Affecting Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83

Synchronization of PSAX System Software on Redundant CPUn Modules . . . . . . . 3-84

Maintenance Testing on DS1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

Reduction in Post-Dial Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86

System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86

RADIUS Server Authentication for PSAX System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86

ATM Security on Interfaces and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

SDH Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88

PSAX Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89

3-71

3-72

3-73

3-74

3-75

3-77

3-80

3-81

3-82

3-83

3-84

3-85

3-86

3-87

3-88

3-89

4 Using VT100 Terminal Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Connecting a PC to the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Setting Up The Windows HyperTerminal Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Connecting a Dialup Modem to the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

5 Site-Specific Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Logging onto the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Console Interface Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Setting Up RADIUS Server Access Authentication for the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xi

4-1

4-2

4-4

5-1

5-5

5-6

Table of Contents

Overview of Tasks for Setting Up a RADIUS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Configuring RADIUS Server Options on the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Changing the System Password and Other User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Changing the System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Changing Other User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Configuring the System for Your Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Accessing the Site-Specific Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Configuring System Identification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Rules for Configuring IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Rules for Configuring IP Address Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Configuring Master ATM Address and OAM Related Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Configuring System-Related Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Configuring System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Configuring the PSAX System as a TCP Server or a TCP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Configuring the CPU3 Module Ethernet Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Configuring Call Control Resource Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Setting the Configuration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Saving the Configuration and Rebooting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Backing Up Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Configuring GR-303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Configuring TAS Module System-Wide Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Configuring H.248 Media Gateway Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Configuring DSP Resource Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Enabling and Disabling PSAX System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Rebooting CPUn Modules in Redundant and Nonredundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Saving Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Rebooting the Redundant PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Rebooting the Nonredundant PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Configuring ISDN Q.921 User Adaptation (IUA) Layer Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Configuring Interface Protection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Setting Up an Interface Protection Group ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Creating an Interface Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

N:1 Protection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Configuring N:1 Protection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Viewing and Changing N:1 Protection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

Internet Protocol (IP) Throttling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

SNMP Trap Activation and Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Enabling and Disabling SNMP Trap Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

Trap Activation Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

5-6

5-7

5-10

5-11

5-18

5-19

5-22

5-24

5-25

5-27

5-28

5-29

5-32

5-33

5-35

5-42

5-44

5-48

5-49

5-51

5-52

5-54

5-55

5-58

5-62

5-67

5-73

5-77

5-78

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xii 255-700-686R10.0.0

Table of Contents

Collecting Bulk Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Overview of Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Configuring the PSAX System to Use a Statistics Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Using the Equipment Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Accessing the Equipment Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Alarm Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Configuring the Stratum 3–4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Setting the Stratum Configuration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

Switching the Line Timing Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99

Saving the Equipment Configuration Values and Logging Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

6 Configuring ATM PNNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Overview of ATM PNNI Systemwide Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Configuring an ATM PNNI Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Modifying an ATM PNNI Node Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Configuring an ATM PNNI Node Peer Group Leader (PGL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Configuring an ATM PNNI Node Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Configuring an ATM PNNI Node SVCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Viewing PNNI Node Scope Mapping Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Configuring an ATM Security Agent for an ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Node . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Configuring an ATM PNNI Route Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Configuring ATM PNNI Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Configuring a Summary Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

Viewing ATM PNNI Map Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Viewing ATM PNNI Map Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

Viewing ATM PNNI Map Address Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

Viewing the ATM PNNI Link Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Viewing ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

Viewing the ATM PNNI Neighbor Peer Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

Viewing the ATM PNNI Neighbor Peer Port Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

Viewing ATM PNNI PTSE Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

Viewing ATM PNNI System Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

5-81

5-84

5-89

5-90

5-91

5-99

5-100

6-1

6-9

6-12

6-15

6-17

6-20

6-26

6-31

6-34

6-38

6-43

6-46

6-52

6-55

6-59

6-61

6-65

7 Configuring ATM Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Configuring Switched IWF Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Configuring Nonswitched IWF Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Configuring the Local IWF Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Configuring a Remote IWF Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Adding a Signaling VCC Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xiii

7-1

7-2

7-5

7-9

Table of Contents

Adding a Bearer VCC Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Adding a Narrowband Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Adding a Broadband Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Viewing ATM Trunking Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Adding ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

8 Configuring V5.2 European IDLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Overview of the V5.2 European IDLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

V5.2 PSTN Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Network Side Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

V5.2 User Side Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

V5.2 IWF Device Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

LE Voice Switch Interoperability with the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

V5.2 IAD Interoperability with the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

V5.2 ISDN Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

PSTN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Enabling the V5 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Setting Call Control Resource Allocation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Accessing the V5 Resource Allocation Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Accessing the V5 DSP Over Subscription Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Accessing the V5 Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Adding New Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Accessing the V5 Variant Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Accessing the V5 Interface Variant Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Accessing the V5 Physical C-Channel Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Accessing the V5 Physical C-Channel Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Accessing the V5 E1 Link Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Accessing the V5 E1 Link Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

Accessing the V5 E1 Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Accessing the V5 Time Slot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

Accessing the V5 Data Link Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

Accessing the V5 Data Link Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

User Side Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Accessing the V5 User Port Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

Accessing the V5 User Port Configuration Window, PSTN Port Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54

Accessing the V5 User Port Configuration Window, ISDN Port Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60

Accessing the V5 B Channels CID Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

7-14

7-29

7-31

7-32

7-34

8-1

8-3

8-4

8-5

8-9

8-12

8-18

8-23

8-26

8-28

8-31

8-33

8-37

8-38

8-42

8-43

8-46

8-47

8-48

8-50

8-52

8-53

8-54

8-60

8-61

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xiv 255-700-686R10.0.0

Table of Contents

9 Configuring SNMP Authentication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

SNMP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Accessing SNMP Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Modifying an SNMP Community String Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Configuring the User-based Security Model (USM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Configuring USM Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Changing a USM User’s Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Deleting USM Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Configuring the View-based Access Control Model (VACM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Configuring VACM Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Modifying VACM Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Deleting VACM Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Assigning a User to a VACM Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Re-assigning a User to a Different VACM Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Deleting a User from a VACM Access Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Configuring SNMP Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Configuring V3 Informs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

9-1

9-2

9-4

9-7

9-11

9-14

9-20

9-21

9-26

9-27

9-28

9-32

10 Configuring ATM Security Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Availability of the ATM Security Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Prerequisites for Configuring ATM Security Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Configuring ATM Security for ATM UNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessing ATM Security for an ATM UNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Configuring an ATM Security Agent for an ATM UNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Viewing ATM Security Agent Statistics for an ATM UNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Configuring ATM Security for ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Accessing ATM Security for an ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Configuring an ATM Security Agent for an ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Node . . . . . . . . 10-14

Viewing ATM Security Agent Statistics for an ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Node . . . . . . 10-20

Configuring ATM Security for ATM PNNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Accessing ATM Security for an ATM PNNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Configuring an ATM Security Agent for an ATM PNNI Interface—Signaling PVC . 10-26

Viewing ATM Security Agent Statistics for an ATM PNNI Interface—Signaling PVC 10-32

Configuring an ATM Security Agent for an ATM PNNI Interface—Routing PVC . . 10-35

Viewing ATM Security Agent Statistics for an ATM PNNI Interface—Routing PVC . 10-40

Viewing All ATM Security Agents in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

10-1

10-2

10-4

10-9

10-13

10-14

10-20

10-24

10-26

10-32

10-35

10-40

10-44

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xv

Table of Contents

11 Using System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Accessing Diagnostic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Viewing System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Checking the Module Connection Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Running Cell Test Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Rebooting PSAX Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Removing Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17

Unlocking a Telnet Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17

Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

Enabling OAM Loopback Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

OAM Activation and Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24

12 Backing Up and Restoring PSAX System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Database Configuration Save and Restore Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Choosing the Configuration Files Transfer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Backing Up System Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Backing Up Database Files Using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Backing Up Database Files Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

PSAX System Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

Backing Up Database Files Using XModem/YModem Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Setting Up for the File Transfer Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9

Copying the Database Files to a Remote Storage Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9

Restoring System Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Restoring Database Files Using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Restoring Database Files Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Restoring Database Files Using XModem/YModem File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Setting Up for the File Transfer Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Copying the Backup Files to the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

Restoring Backup Files to the Standby CPUn Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

Rebooting the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19

11-1

11-3

11-7

11-9

11-14

11-17

11-19

11-24

12-1

12-2

12-3

12-6

12-7

12-8

12-9

12-14

12-15

12-16

12-17

12-18

12-19

13 Upgrading PSAX System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Required Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Saving Your Modified System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Backing Up Your Current Database Files Prior to Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Choosing the System Software File Transfer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xvi 255-700-686R10.0.0

13-1

13-2

Table of Contents

Upgrading Using the File Transfer Protocol Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Setting Up a Windows FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Downloading Software Files Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Upgrading the PSAX System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Saving Your System Configuration Before System Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Module LED Indicators During Booting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

System Events During Booting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Verifying Successful Downloading of Module Firmware Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Upgrading Using the XModem/YModem File Transfer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Setting Up for the File Transfer Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Downloading Software Files Using XModem/YModem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Upgrading the PSAX System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Manually Selecting I/O and Server Module Firmware Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Accessing the Firmware Version Control Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

Selecting a Firmware Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

Downloading a Firmware Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29

A Common Equipment Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Overview of This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

AC Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

DC Power Supply Connector for the PSAX 1250 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

CPUn Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

CONSOLE Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

ETHERNET1 and ETHERNET2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Console Cable Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Stratum 3–4 Module Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

PSAX 1000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

PSAX 1250 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

PSAX 2300 and PSAX 4500 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

Fan/Alarm Module Alarm Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

Alarm Module and PSAX 4500 Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

ALARM Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

STATUS/CONTROL Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

13-3

13-4

13-10

13-11

13-12

13-13

13-15

13-16

13-22

13-23

13-24

13-29

A-1

A-2

A-3

A-4

A-5

A-7

A-10

B Configuring In-Band Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Overview of In-Band Management Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Using the Direct Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Setting Up the FORE Card on the SUN Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Setting Up ATM ARP Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Using the Routed Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Setting Up Connections for a Routed Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xvii

B-1

B-2

B-3

B-4

B-5

Table of Contents

Setting PVC Connections for Routed Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Using the Hybrid Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

C Reference Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Overview of This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

ATM Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Purpose of Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

ATM Connections Supporting Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Types of Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Traffic Shaping Priorities by Configured Feature on PSAX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

SPVC Connection Cause Codes for Connection Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

DSP Tone Detection Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

Connection Type by Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Interface Type by Input/Output Module Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

ATM Service Categories in the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

ATM Service Category Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

Priority of ATM Service Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

Traffic Shaping, UPC, and Virtual Interface Configuration Compatibilities . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

ATM Traffic Shaping Sample CPS Calculation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

PSAX I/O Module Transmit Clock Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20

B-6

B-9

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-5

C-8

C-9

C-10

C-14

C-15

C-16

C-17

C-20

D PSAX Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Overview of This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

DS1/T1 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

6-Port DS1 IMA Module (20N33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

6-Port Enhanced DS1/T1 Module (20N36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

8-Port HDSL-2 Module (23N69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 IMA Module (23N33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module (23N64) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

12-Port Medium-Density DS1/E1/DS0A CES Module (24N64) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

D-1

D-3

D-4

D-5

D-6

D-7

D-8

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xviii 255-700-686R10.0.0

Table of Contents

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9

24-Port High-Density DS1 Multiservice Module (23N35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11

DS3, E3, and STS-1e Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11

1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice Module (23N60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12

3-Port Channelized DS3/STS-1e CES Module (23N03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14

3-Port Channelized DS3/STS-1e CES Protection Module (45N03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15

3-Port Channelized DS3/STS-1e Multiservice Protection Module (45N63) . . . . . . . . D-15

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16

1-Port Channelized STS-1e, T1 Module (23N62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18

3-Port DS3/E3 ATM Module (23N74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18

3-Port DS3/E3 ATM Protection Module (45N74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19

2-Port DS3 ATM Module (20N02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20

1-Port Unchannelized DS3 Frame Relay Module (20N03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21

1-Port DS3 IMA Module (23N68) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22

2-Port E3 ATM Module (20N22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22

3-Port Unstructured DS3/E3 CES Module (23N02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23

D-9

D-10

D-11

D-12

D-13

D-14

D-15

D-16

D-17

D-18

D-19

D-20

D-21

D-22

D-23

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xix

Table of Contents

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23

3-Port Unstructured DS3/E3 CES Protection Module (45N02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24

DSP2 Voice Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24

DSP2x Voice Server Modules (23N29 (D), 23N26 (E), 23N25 (F), and 23N24 (G)) . . . D-24

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

E1 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

6-Port E1 IMA Module (20N34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

6-Port Enhanced E1 Multiservice Module (20N56) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27

21-Port High-Density E1 IMA Module (23N34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28

21-Port High-Density E1 Multiservice Module (23N66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29

Ethernet Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29

4-Port Ethernet Module (23N40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-30

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-30

Ethernet Module (20N40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32

Fiber-Optic Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32

1-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 CES Module (23N12 (MM)/23N13 (SM)) . . . . . . . D-32

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33

D-23

D-24

D-25

D-26

D-27

D-28

D-29

D-30

D-31

D-32

D-33

1-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 Unstructured CES/ATM Module

(23N75 (MM)/23N76 (SM)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35

4-Port OC-3c/STM-1 Module (24N72 (MM)/24N73 (SM)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36

1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c Module (23N72 (MM)/23N73 (SM)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37

D-34

D-35

D-36

D-37

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xx 255-700-686R10.0.0

Table of Contents

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37

1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS Module (20N72 (MM)/20N73 (SM)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38

1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP Module (20N92 (MM)/20N93 (SM)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40

2-Port OC-3c/STM-1 ATM Module (24N70 (MM)/24N71 (SM)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-41

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-41

2-Port OC-3c/STM-1 Enhanced ATM Module (24N74 (MM)/24N75 (SM)) . . . . . . . . D-42

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-42

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-42

Line Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-43

PSAX 4500 3-Port Line Interface Module (45N01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-43

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44

PSAX 1000 3-Port Line Interface Module (45N01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45

Other Server Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45

Enhanced Router Module (23N41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-46

Route Server Module (20N41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-46

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-47

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-47

Tones and Announcements Server Module (23N28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-48

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-48

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49

Serial Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49

6-Port Multiserial Module (20N07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-50

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-51

Quadserial Module (23N07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-52

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-52

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-52

Voice 2-Wire Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53

4-Port Voice 2-Wire Office Module (20N32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53

D-37

D-38

D-39

D-40

D-41

D-42

D-43

D-44

D-45

D-46

D-47

D-48

D-49

D-50

D-51

D-52

D-53

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxi

Table of Contents

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53

8-Port Voice 2-Wire Station Module (20N30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-54

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-54

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-54

D-53

D-54

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxii 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Figures

1-1 Field Description Table Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1-2 Main Menu Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

2-1 PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-2 Front View of the PSAX 1000 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-3 Rear View of the PSAX 1000 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-4 PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway(19-in.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-5 PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway (23-in.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-6 PSAX 1250 48.26-cm (19-in.) Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2-7 PSAX 1250 58.42-cm (23-in.) Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2-8 PacketStar PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2-9 PacketStar PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2-10 Data Flow Through the PSAX 4500 Midplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2-11 PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/-48 V dc Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2-12 PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/110/220 V ac Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

2-13 Stratum 3–4/24 V dc Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2-14 PSAX 1250 110 Vac, 220 Vac, and -48 V dc Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

2-15 PSAX 2300/4500 -48 V dc Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

2-16 PSAX 1250 Stratum 3–4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

2-17 PSAX 4500 Stratum 3–4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

2-18 Stratum 3–4 Module Traffic Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

2-19 PSAX 1000 CPU3 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

2-20 PSAX CPU4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

2-21 PSAX 1000 Fan/Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

2-22 PSAX 4500 Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

2-23 Example Configuration with the PSAX 4500 Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

2-24 Generating Central Office Alarms (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

2-25 Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm Module ALARM Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

2-26 Fan/Alarm Module ALARM Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

2-27 Generating Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

2-28 Monitoring and Reporting on External Events (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

2-29 Control Output Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

2-30 Activating Supplemental Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

2-31 Monitoring and Reporting on Door Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

3-1 Sample SPVC Reconnection Prioritization Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3-2 PNNI Hierarchical Topology Showing Three Node Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

3-3 DBA-Controlled Backplane Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

1-4

1-6

2-2

2-3

2-6

2-8

2-9

2-11

2-15

2-17

2-19

2-20

2-21

2-26

2-28

2-30

2-33

2-37

2-39

2-40

2-42

2-43

2-45

2-48

2-49

2-50

2-51

2-52

2-53

3-5

3-16

3-25

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxiii

List of Figures

3-4 PSAX System as a TCP Client Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

3-5 PSAX System as a TCP Server Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

3-6 N:1 Traffic Protection Scheme on the PSAX 4500 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

3-7 1:1 Protection Scheme on the PSAX 1000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

3-8 1:1 Protection Scheme on the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3-9 Typical Interface Protection Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

3-10 Automatic Traffic Rerouting using DHPVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

3-11 Relationship Between LANET and the OSI Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

3-12 LANET Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

3-13 OAM Cell Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

3-14 OAM Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

3-15 OAM Activation/Deactivation Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

3-16 Sample ATM Traffic Shaping Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

3-17 Sample Uses of Virtual Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72

3-18 Combining the UPC Feature and Either the TS or VI Feature on a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73

3-19 PacketPipe AAL5-to-AAL2 Wireless Trunking from Cell Site to MSC for Mobile Voice . . . . . 3-77

3-20 Virtual Router Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78

3-21 Route Server and Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79

3-22 Enhanced Router and Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79

3-23 End-to-End Continuity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

3-24 PSAX System Access Authentication via RADIUS Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

4-1 Connection Description Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4-2 Connect To Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-3 COM1 Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-4 PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway System Logon Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

5-1 PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway System Logon Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5-2 Console Interface Main Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5-3 User Options Window—Logged on as Username Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5-4 User Options Window—Authentication Mode Hybrid Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5-5 User Options Window—Logged on as Username Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5-6 User Options Window—Logged on as Username Readwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5-7 User Options Window—Logged on as Username Readonly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5-8 Site-Specific Menu Window (No System Options Configured) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

5-9 Site-Specific Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5-10 TCP Server Configuration Window (PSAX System as a TCP Client) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5-11 TCP Server Configuration Window (PSAX System as a TCP Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5-12 Site-Specific Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

5-13 Call Control Resource Allocation Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

5-14 Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

5-15 Remote Reboot Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

3-30

3-31

3-36

3-39

3-42

3-45

3-47

3-53

3-54

3-56

3-58

3-61

3-67

3-72

3-73

3-77

3-78

3-79

3-80

3-87

4-2

4-3

4-4

5-2

5-5

5-8

5-13

5-14

5-19

5-26

5-30

5-31

5-34

5-43

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxiv 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Figures

5-16 Site-Specific Menu Window (Feature Turn On/Off Option Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

5-17 Feature Turn On/Off Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

5-18 Console Interface Main Menu Window (Save Configuration Option Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

5-19 Remote Reboot Configuration Window (Primary Switchover Option Selected) . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

5-20 Remote Reboot Configuration Window (Reboot Primary CPU Option Selected) . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

5-21 Sample IUA Layer Configuration for the OMG and TMG Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

5-22 Interface Protection Feature Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

5-23 Protection Group Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

5-24 Protection Group Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

5-25 Interface Protection Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

5-26 Interface Protection Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

5-27 N to M Protection Feature Menu Window (N:1 Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

5-28 N to M Protection Group Table Window (N:1 Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

5-29 N to M Protection Group Configuration Window (N:1 Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

5-30 N to M Protection Group Configuration Window (1:1 Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

5-31 N to M Protection Feature Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

5-32 N to M Protection Table Window (N:1 Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

5-33 N to M Protection Table Window (1:1 Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

5-34 N to M Protection Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

5-35 Site-Specific Menu (IP Throttling Configuration Option Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

5-36 The IP Throttling Window (Disabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

5-37 The IP Throttling Window (Enabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

5-38 Trap Activation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

5-39 Bulk Statistics Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

5-45

5-46

5-49

5-50

5-52

5-53

5-55

5-56

5-57

5-59

5-60

5-62

5-63

5-64

5-67

5-68

5-71

5-73

5-74

5-79

5-82

5-40 Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1000

System (Page 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

5-85

5-41 Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1250

System (Page 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

5-85

5-42 Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 2300 or

PSAX 4500 System (Page 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

5-86

5-43 Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1000, PSAX 2300, or

PSAX 4500 System (Page 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

5-86

5-44 Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1250

System (Page 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

5-45 Stratum Configuration Window (Freerun) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

5-46 Stratum Configuration Window (LineTiming Synchronization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

5-47 Save Configuration [Modified] (Before Saving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

6-1 PNNI System-Wide Configuration Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-2 PNNI Node Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6-3 PNNI Node Configuration Window (Before Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

6-4 PNNI Node Configuration Window (After Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

6-5 PNNI Node PGL Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

5-87

5-92

5-101

6-2

6-3

6-5

6-10

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxv

List of Figures

6-6 PNNI Node Timer Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-7 PNNI Node SVCC Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

6-8 PNNI Scope Mapping Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6-9 PNNI Route Address Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6-10 PNNI Local Route Address Through Interface Index Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

6-11 PNNI Route Address Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

6-12 PNNI Metrics Table Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

6-13 PNNI Metrics Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

6-14 PNNI Summary Address Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

6-15 PNNI Summary Address Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

6-16 PNNI Map Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

6-17 PNNI Map Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

6-18 PNNI Map Node Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

6-19 PNNI Map Node Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

6-20 PNNI Map Address Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

6-21 PNNI Map Address Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

6-22 PNNI Link Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6-23 PNNI Link Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

6-24 PNNI SvccRcc Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

6-25 PNNI SVCC RCC Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53

6-26 PNNI Neighbor Peer Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56

6-27 PNNI Neighbor Peer Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

6-28 PNNI Neighbor Peer Port Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60

6-29 PNNI PTSE Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62

6-30 PNNI PTSE Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

6-31 PNNI System Statistics Screen Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

7-1 Site-Specific Menu Window—ATM Trunking Configuration Option Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-2 ATM Trunking Local Node Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-3 ATM Trunking Remote IWF Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7-4 ATM Trunking Remote IWF Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7-5 ATM Trunking Sig VCC Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7-6 ATM Trunking Sig VCC Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7-7 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

7-8 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

7-9 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7-10 ATM Trunking Narrowband Routing Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

7-11 ATM Trunking Broadband Routing Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

7-12 ATM Trunking Data Channel Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

7-13 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Profile Config Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7-14 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Profile Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

6-13

6-16

6-18

6-21

6-22

6-23

6-27

6-28

6-31

6-33

6-35

6-36

6-39

6-40

6-44

6-45

6-47

6-48

6-52

6-53

6-56

6-57

6-60

6-62

6-63

6-65

7-3

7-6

7-7

7-10

7-11

7-15

7-17

7-25

7-30

7-31

7-33

7-35

7-36

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxvi 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Figures

8-1 Site-Specific Menu Window (Feature Turn On/Off Option Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8-2 Feature Turn On/Off Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8-3 Site-Specific Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

8-4 Call Control Resource Allocation Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

8-5 V5 Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

8-6 V5 Resource Allocation Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

8-7 V5 DSP Over Subscription Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

8-8 V5 DSP Resource Pool Over Subscription Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

8-9 V5 Interface Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

8-10 V5 Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

8-11 V5 Intf Variant Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

8-12 V5 Interface Variant Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

8-13 V5 Physical C-Channel Configuration Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

8-14 V5 Physical C-Channel Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

8-15 V5 E1 Link Configuration Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

8-16 V5 E1 Link Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

8-17 V5 E1 Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

8-18 V5 Time Slot Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

8-19 V5 Data Link Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

8-20 V5 Data Link Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

8-21 V5 User Port Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

8-22 V5 User Port Configuration Window for PSTN as Port Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55

8-23 V5 User Port Configuration Window, Port Type ISDN Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

8-24 V5 B Channels CID Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62

9-1 Site-Specific Menu Window, SNMP Agent Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-2 SNMP Agent System-Wide Configuration Window, Non-Root User View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-3 SNMP Agent System-Wide Configuration Window, Root User View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9-4 Community String Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9-5 Community String Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

9-6 Usm User Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9-7 Usm User Creation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9-8 Usm User Key Change Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

9-9 Vacm Access Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

9-10 Vacm Access Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

9-11 Vacm Security to Group Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

9-12 Vacm Security to Group Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

9-13 Notification Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

9-14 Notification Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

10-1 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-2 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Configuration Window (Integrity Security Service Only) . . 10-5

8-7

8-10

8-11

8-19

8-20

8-23

8-25

8-27

8-29

8-32

8-34

8-37

8-39

8-42

8-44

8-46

8-48

8-49

8-50

8-53

8-55

8-61

8-62

9-3

9-4

9-5

9-6

9-8

9-9

9-12

9-15

9-17

9-23

9-25

9-28

9-29

10-3

10-5

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxvii

List of Figures

10-3 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Configuration Window (Both Integrity and Confidentiality

Security Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

10-4 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

10-5 PNNI Node Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

10-6 PNNI Node Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

10-7 ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Security Configuration Window (Integrity Security Service Only) . . . 10-15

10-5

10-10

10-14

10-15

10-8 ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Security Configuration Window (Both Integrity

and Confidentiality Security Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

10-9 PNNI SVCC RCC Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

10-10 ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Security Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

10-11 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

10-16

10-20

10-21

10-25

10-12 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration

Window - Signaling PVC (Integrity Security Service Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

10-27

10-13 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration

Window - Signaling PVC (Both Integrity Security and Confidentiality Services) . . . . . . . . 10-28

10-14 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Statistics - Signaling PVC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

10-28

10-32

10-15 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration - Routing PVC

Window (Integrity Security Service Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

10-36

10-16 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration - Routing PVC

Window (Both Integrity Security and Confidentiality Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

10-17 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Statistics - Routng PVC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

10-18 ATM Security Agents Table Window (Populated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

10-19 ATM Security Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

11-1 Console Interface Main Menu Window (Diagnostics Option Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11-2 Diagnostics Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11-3 System Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11-4 Module Connection Count Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

11-5 Cell Test Diagnostics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

11-6 Cell Test Payload Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

11-7 Remote Reboot Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

11-8 Unlock Shell / Ping Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18

11-9 OAM Loopback Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20

11-10 OAM Loopback Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21

11-11 OAM Activate & Deactivate Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25

11-12 OAM Activation – Deactivation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26

12-1 Remote Database Operation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12-2 Software Version Configuration window (XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Selected) . . . . 12-10

12-3 XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Window (Send Options Panel Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11

12-4 XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Window (Receive Options Panel Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

13-1 Console Interface Main Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

13-2 Software Version Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

13-3 SRD Download Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

10-36

10-41

10-44

10-47

11-2

11-4

11-8

11-10

11-12

11-15

11-18

11-20

11-21

11-25

11-26

12-4

12-10

12-11

12-18

13-4

13-5

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxviii 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Figures

13-4 Migration of the Files During the PSAX System Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

13-5 Software Version Configuration Window (XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Selected) . . . 13-17

13-6 XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Window (Receive Options Panel Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

13-7 Console Interface Main Menu Window (Software Version Configuration Option Selected) 13-23

13-8 The Software Version Configuration Window (Firmware Version Control Selected) . . . . . . 13-24

13-9 Firmware Version Control Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26

A-1 AC Power Supply Connector Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A-2 -48 V dc Power Supply Module Terminal Block Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-3 ETHERNET1 and ETHERNET2 Connector Pin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A-4 Attaching the External Clock Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

A-5 ALARM Connector Pin Locations on the Fan/Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

A-6 ALARM Cable with 26-Pin Connector and Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

A-7 ALARM Connector Pin Locations on the Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

A-8 ALARM Connector Pin Locations on the PSAX 4500 Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

A-9 ALARM Cable with 26-Pin Connector and Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

A-10 STATUS/CONTROL Connector Pin Locations on the Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

A-11 STATUS/CONTROL Connector Pin Locations on the PSAX 4500 Alarm Module . . . . . . . . . . A-10

A-12 STATUS/CONTROL Cable with 44-Pin Connector and Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

B-1 Direct Connection Configuration Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B-2 Routed Connection Configuration Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

B-3 Hybrid Connection Configuration Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

C-1 Combining the UPC Feature and Either the TS or VI Feature on a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

13-11

13-17

13-18

13-23

13-24

13-26

A-1

A-2

A-3

A-4

A-6

A-8

A-10

A-11

B-2

B-4

B-10

C-17

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxix

List of Figures

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxx 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Tables

1-1 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1-2 Command Description Table Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-3 System Responses to Selecting Options, Fields, or Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1-4 Shortcut Keys for Navigating Console Interface Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2-1 PSAX 1000 Chassis Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-2 PSAX 1000 System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2-3 PSAX 1250 Chassis Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2-4 PSAX 1250 System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-5 PSAX 2300 Chassis Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2-6 PSAX 2300 System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2-7 Chassis Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2-8 System Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2-9 PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

2-10 -48 V dc Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

2-11 110 V ac Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

2-12 220 V ac Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

2-13 -48 V dc Power Supply Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

2-14 Stratum 3–4 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

2-15 PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2-16 PSAX 1000 CPU3 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

2-17 CPU4 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

2-18 Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm Module Alarm Generation Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

2-19 Fan/Alarm Module Alarm Generation Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

2-20 PSAX 4500 Midplane Slot Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

2-21 Performance and Power Specifications for the PSAX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

3-1 Sample User-Defined Priority Scheme for Reconnecting SPVC ATM IMA Links . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3-2 SVC Call State Transition Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3-3 Forward Error Correction Automatic Rate Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

3-4 Modules Supporting OAM Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

3-5 CBR and VBR Service-Level Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

3-6 ATM Traffic Management Capabilities by Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70

3-7 ATM Traffic Shaping, UPC Support, and VI Support Configuration Compatibility . . . . . . . . 3-73

4-1 Starting the Hyperterminal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4-2 Windows HyperTerminal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

5-1 PSAX System Logon Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5-2 Console Interface Main Menu Options and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

1-2

1-3

1-5

2-4

2-5

2-9

2-10

2-13

2-17

2-18

2-24

2-26

2-27

2-29

2-30

2-32

2-39

2-41

2-46

2-47

2-54

2-56

3-5

3-8

3-49

3-59

3-63

3-70

3-73

4-2

4-4

5-3

5-5

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxxi

List of Tables

5-3 User Options Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5-4 User Options Window Field Descriptions (RADIUS Server Fields) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5-5 Permissions for PSAX-defined Usernames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

5-6 User Options Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5-9

5-12

5-14

5-7 User Options Window Field Descriptions (Password and Miscellaneous

User Options Fields) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5-8 ASCII Characters Permitted for Use in Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5-9 Site-Specific Menu Options Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5-14

5-16

5-20

5-10 System Identification Panel on the Site-Specific Configuration Window

Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

5-11 Site-Specific Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5-23

5-26

5-12 Master ATM Address and OAM Related Data Panel on the Site-Specific Configuration

Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5-13 System Related Data Panel on the Site-Specific Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

5-26

5-28

5-14 System Date and Time Panel on the Site-Specific Configuration Window

Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5-15 TCP Server Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5-16 TCP Server Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5-17 Call Control Resource Allocation Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

5-18 Call Control Resource Allocation Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

5-19 PSAX System Performance Capabilities Per Node for Release 10.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

5-20 Feature Turn ON/OFF Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

5-21 Feature Turn On/Off Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

5-22 IUA Layer Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

5-23 IUA Layer Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

5-24 Interface Protection Feature Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

5-25 Protection Group Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

5-26 Protection Group Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

5-27 Protection Group Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

5-28 Interface Protection Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

5-29 Interface Protection Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

5-30 Interface Protection Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

5-31 N to M Protection Feature Menu Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

5-32 N to M Protection Group Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

5-33 N to M Protection Group Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

5-34 N to M Protection Group Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

5-35 N to M Protection Feature Menu Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

5-36 N to M Protection Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

5-37 N to M Protection Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

5-38 N to M Protection Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

5-39 N to M Protection Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

5-29

5-31

5-32

5-35

5-41

5-46

5-47

5-53

5-56

5-57

5-59

5-60

5-61

5-62

5-63

5-65

5-67

5-69

5-71

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxxii 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Tables

5-40 IP Throttling Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

5-41 IP Throttling Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

5-42 Trap Activation Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

5-43 Trap Activation Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

5-44 Bulk Statistics Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

5-45 Bulk Statistics Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

5-46 Equipment Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

5-47 Equipment Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

5-48 Module Alarm Status Descriptions on the Equipment Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

5-49 Stratum Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

5-50 Stratum Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

5-51 Messages Generated after the Save Configuration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

6-1 PNNI System-Wide Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-2 PNNI Node Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6-3 PNNI Node Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6-4 PNNI Node Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6-5 PNNI Node Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6-6 Modifying a Configured PNNI Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

6-7 PNNI Node Timer Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

6-8 PNNI Node PGL Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

6-9 PNNI Node Timer Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-10 PNNI Node Timer Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-11 PNNI Node Timer Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

6-12 PNNI Node SVCC Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

6-13 PNNI Scope Mapping Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6-14 PNNI Scope Mapping Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6-15 PNNI Route Address Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6-16 PNNI Route Address Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

6-17 PNNI Local Route Address Through Interface Index Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

6-18 PNNI Route Address Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

6-19 PNNI Route Address Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

6-20 PNNI Metrics Table Screen Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

6-21 PNNI Metrics Table Screen Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

6-22 PNNI Metrics Configuration Screen Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

6-23 PNNI Metrics Configuration Screen Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

6-24 PNNI Summary Address Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

6-25 PNNI Summary Address Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

6-26 PNNI Summary Address Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

6-27 PNNI Summary Address Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

6-28 PNNI Map Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

5-74

5-75

5-79

5-80

5-82

5-87

5-88

5-90

5-93

5-101

6-2

6-4

6-6

6-9

6-10

6-13

6-16

6-18

6-21

6-22

6-23

6-24

6-27

6-28

6-29

6-32

6-33

6-36

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxxiii

List of Tables

6-29 PNNI Map Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

6-30 PNNI Map Information Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

6-31 PNNI Map Information Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37

6-32 PNNI Map Node Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

6-33 PNNI Map Node Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

6-34 PNNI Map Node Information Window Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

6-35 PNNI Map Node Information Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

6-36 PNNI Map Address Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

6-37 PNNI Map Address Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

6-38 PNNI Map Address Information Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

6-39 PNNI Map Address Information Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

6-40 PNNI Link Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6-41 PNNI Link Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

6-42 PNNI Link Information Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

6-43 PNNI Link Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

6-44 PNNI SvccRcc Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

6-45 PNNI SVCC RCC Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53

6-46 PNNI SVCC RCC Information Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

6-47 PNNI SVCC RCC Information Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

6-48 PNNI Neighbor Peer Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56

6-49 PNNI Neighbor Peer Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

6-50 PNNI Neighbor Peer Information Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

6-51 PNNI Neighbor Peer Information Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58

6-52 PNNI Neighbor Peer Port Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60

6-53 PNNI Neighbor Peer Port Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

6-54 PNNI PTSE Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62

6-55 PNNI PTSE Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

6-56 PNNI Route TNS Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

6-57 PNNI PTSE Information Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

6-58 PNNI System Statistics Screen Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66

6-59 PNNI System Statistics Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66

7-1 ATM Trunking Local Node Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

7-2 ATM Trunking Local Node Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

7-3 ATM Trunking Remote IWF Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7-4 ATM Trunking Remote IWF Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7-5 ATM Trunking Remote IWF Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7-6 ATM Trunking Remote IWF Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

7-7 ATM Trunking Signal VCC Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7-8 ATM Trunking Signal VCC Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7-9 ATM Trunking Signal VCC Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

6-36

6-37

6-39

6-40

6-41

6-44

6-45

6-47

6-48

6-49

6-52

6-53

6-54

6-56

6-57

6-58

6-60

6-61

6-62

6-63

6-64

6-66

7-4

7-6

7-7

7-8

7-10

7-11

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxxiv 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Tables

7-10 ATM Trunking Signal VCC Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7-11 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

7-12 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

7-13 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

7-14 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

7-15 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Parameters Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

7-16 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Parameters Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

7-17 ATM Trunking Narrowband Routing Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

7-18 ATM Trunking Narrowband Routing Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

7-19 ATM Trunking Broadband Routing Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7-20 ATM Trunking Broadband Routing Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7-21 ATM Trunking Data Channel Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

7-22 ATM Trunking Data Channel Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

7-23 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Profile Config Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7-24 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Profile Config Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7-25 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Profile Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

7-26 ATM Trunking Bearer VCC Profile Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

8-1 V5.2 Voice Switch Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8-2 V5.2 IAD Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

8-3 Feature Turn ON/OFF Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

8-4 Feature Turn On/Off Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

8-5 Call Control Resource Allocation Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

8-6 Call Control Resource Allocation Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

8-7 V5 Interface Configuration Menu Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

8-8 V5 Resource Allocation Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

8-9 V5 Resource Allocation Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

8-10 V5 DSP Over Subscription Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

8-11 V5 DSP Over Subscription Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

8-12 V5 DSP Resource Pool Over Subscription Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

7-12

7-15

7-16

7-17

7-18

7-26

7-30

7-32

7-33

7-35

7-36

8-4

8-5

8-8

8-11

8-12

8-19

8-20

8-23

8-24

8-25

8-13 V5 DSP Resource Pool Over Subscription Configuration Window

Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

8-14 V5 Interface Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

8-15 V5 Interface Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

8-16 V5 Interface Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

8-17 V5 Interface Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

8-18 V5 Intf Variant Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

8-19 V5 Interface Variant Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

8-20 V5 Interface Variant Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

8-21 V5 Interface Variant Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

8-22 V5 Physical C-Channel Configuration Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

8-23 V5 Physical C-Channel Configuration Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

8-26

8-27

8-28

8-29

8-30

8-32

8-34

8-35

8-37

8-38

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxxv

List of Tables

8-24 V5 Physical C-Channel Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

8-25 V5 Physical C Channel Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40

8-26 V5 E1 Link Configuration Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

8-27 V5 E1 Link Configuration Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

8-28 V5 E1 Link Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

8-29 V5 E1 Link Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

8-30 V5 E1 Link Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

8-31 V5 E1 Interface Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

8-32 V5 Timeslot Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

8-33 V5 Data Link Configuration Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

8-34 V5 Data Link Configuration Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

8-35 V5 Data Link Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

8-36 V5 Data Link Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51

8-37 V5 User Port Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

8-38 V5 User Port Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55

8-39 V5 User Port Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56

8-40 V5 B Channel CID Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62

8-41 V5 B Channel CID Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62

9-1 SNMP Agent System-Wide Configuration Window Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9-2 Community String Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9-3 Community String Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

9-4 Community String Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

9-5 Community String Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9-6 Default USM User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9-7 Usm User Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9-8 Usm User Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9-9 Usm User Creation Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9-10 Usm User Creation Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9-11 Usm User Key Change Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

9-12 Usm User Key Change Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

9-13 Default VACM Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9-14 Vacm Access Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

9-15 Vacm Access Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

9-16 Vacm Access Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

9-17 Vacm Access Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

9-18 Default VACM Access Group Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

9-19 Valid VACM Group Assignment for USM Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

9-20 Vacm Security to Group Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

9-21 Vacm Security to Group Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

9-22 Vacm Security to Group Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

8-39

8-40

8-42

8-43

8-44

8-46

8-47

8-48

8-49

8-50

8-51

8-53

8-55

8-56

8-62

9-4

9-5

9-6

9-7

9-9

9-10

9-12

9-13

9-14

9-15

9-16

9-17

9-18

9-21

9-22

9-23

9-24

9-25

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxxvi 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Tables

9-23 Vacm Security to Group Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

9-24 Notification Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

9-25 Notification Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

9-26 Notification Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

9-27 Notification Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

10-1 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-2 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10-3 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

10-4 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

10-5 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Statistics Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

10-6 ATM UNI Interface ATM Security Statistics Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

10-7 ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Security Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

10-8 ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Security Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

10-9 ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Security Statistics Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

10-10 ATM PNNI SVCC RCC Security Statistics Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

10-11 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

10-12 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

9-26

9-29

9-30

10-3

10-4

10-6

10-10

10-11

10-16

10-17

10-21

10-22

10-25

10-26

10-13 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration - Signaling PVC

Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

10-28

10-14 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration - Signaling PVC Window

Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

10-29

10-15 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Statistics - Signaling PVC

Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

10-33

10-16 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Statistics - Signaling PVC Window

Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

10-33

10-17 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration - Routing

PVC Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

10-37

10-18 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Configuration - Routing PVC

Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

10-37

10-19 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Statistics - Routing PVC

Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

10-41

10-20 ATM PNNI Interface ATM Security Statistics - Routing PVC Window

Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

10-21 ATM Security Agents Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

10-22 ATM Security Agents Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

10-23 ATM Security Statistics Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

10-24 ATM Security Statistics Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

11-1 Diagnostics Menu Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-2 System Information Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11-3 System Information Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

11-4 Module Connection Count Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

11-5 Module Connection Count Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

10-42

10-45

10-47

10-48

11-3

11-4

11-5

11-8

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxxvii

List of Tables

11-6 Cell Test Diagnostics Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

11-7 Cell Test Diagnostics Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

11-8 Cell Test Payload Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

11-9 Cell Test Payload Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

11-10 Remote Reboot Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

11-11 OAM Loopback Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20

11-12 OAM Loopback Table Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21

11-13 OAM Loopback Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22

11-14 OAM Loopback Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22

11-15 OAM Activate & Deactivate Table Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25

11-16 OAM Activation - Deactivation Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26

11-17 OAM Activation - Deactivation Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26

11-10

11-11

11-12

11-13

11-16

11-20

11-21

11-22

11-25

11-26

12-1 Tasks for Copying Database Configuration Files Between the PSAX System and a

Remote Storage Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12-2 Remote Database Operation Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12-3 Remote Database Operation Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12-4 PSAX System Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

12-5 XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11

12-6 XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

12-7 Connecting a Cable to the Standby (Backup) CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19

13-1 Tasks for Transferring Files to Your PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13-2 SRD Download Configuration Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

13-3 SRD Download Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

12-2

12-4

12-8

12-11

12-12

12-19

13-2

13-6

13-4 Error Status Code Values for the [Error Status] Field on the SRD Download

Configuration Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

13-5 Determining Whether to Proceed with System Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

13-6 Determining Whether to Save Your Current System Configuration Before Upgrade . . . . . . 13-12

13-7 Length of Time Required for Firmware Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

13-7

13-10

13-12

13-14

13-8 Setting Up the Connection Between the PC Workstation, the Local

Modem, and the Telephone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

13-9 Setting Up the Connection Between the Modem and the PSAX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

13-10 XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

13-11 XMODEM/YMODEM File Transfer Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

13-12 Selecting Firmware Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

13-13 Firmware Version Control Window Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26

13-14 Firmware Version Control Window Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

A-1 AC Power Supply Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A-2 -48 V dc Power Supply Module Terminal Block Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-3 CPUn Module CONSOLE Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-4 CPUn Module ETHERNET1 and ETHERNET2 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A-5 RJ-12-to-DB9 Adapter Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

13-16

13-18

13-19

13-25

13-26

13-27

A-1

A-2

A-3

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xxxviii 255-700-686R10.0.0

List of Tables

A-6 RJ-12-to-DB25 Adapter Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

A-7 Stratum 3–4 Module Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

A-8 Stratum 3–4 Module RJ-45 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

A-4

A-5

A-9 ALARM Connector Pin Assignments and Cable Pigtail Color Code

(COMCODE 300164290) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

A-6

A-10 ALARM Connector Pin Assignments and Cable Pigtail Color Code

(COMCODE 300164290) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

A-9

A-11 STATUS/CONTROL Connector Pin Assignments and Cable Pigtail Color Code

(COMCODE 300164282) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

C-1 Traffic Processing Options and Priority Queueing for Modules Supporting ATM Interfaces . . C-3

C-2 Connection Release Cause Codes for SPVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

C-3 DSP Tone Detection Modes and Associated Processing Performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

C-4 Connection Type by Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

C-5 Interface Type by I/O Module Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

C-6 PSAX System-Supported Quality of Service Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

C-7 Mapping ATM Service Categories to PSAX System Priority Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15

C-8 ATM Traffic Shaping, UPC Support, and VI Support Configuration Compatibility . . . . . . . . C-16

C-9 ATM Traffic Shaping CPS Calculation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

C-10 I/O Module Transmit Clock Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21

D-1 PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D-2 1-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 CES Module Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33

D-3 1-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 Unstructured CES/ATM Module Optical Specifications . . . D-35

D-4 4-Port OC-3c/STM-1 Module Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36

D-5 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c Module Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38

D-6 1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS Module Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39

D-7 PSAX 1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP Module Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40

D-8 2-Port OC-3c/STM-1 ATM Module Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-41

D-9 2-Port OC-3c/STM-1 Enhanced ATM Module Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-43

A-11

C-3

C-5

C-9

C-11

C-14

C-15

C-16

C-17

C-21

D-1

D-33

D-35

D-36

D-38

D-39

D-40

D-41

D-43

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 xxxix

List of Tables

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

xl 255-700-686R10.0.0

Purpose of This Guide

The PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide provides a description of the PSAX system and its functions and features. It also provides information about using the console interface to:

• Configure basic system parameters and managing the PSAX system

• Configure PNNI, ATM trunking, V5.2, SNMP authentication, ATM security,

and other system-wide functions

• Run system diagnostics

• Back up and restore system software

• Upgrade system configurations

• Access system trap definitions

For instructions on using the Navis tions, see the appropriate Navis

Note: If you are setting configuration values for a new, unconfigured

PSAX system for the first time, you should read through this guide before beginning the configuration process.

1 Getting Started

EMS-PSAX to perform the same func-

EMS-PSAX user guide.

Audience for This Guide

The information in this guide is intended for users who will configure and maintain PSAX systems.

What You Should Know

Before you use this document or operate a PSAX system, you should already understand and have experience with the following:

• Ethernet network capabilities

• Internet Protocol capabilities

• Data network design

• Telephony network design

Only authorized personnel should install and use the PacketStar tiservice Media Gateways.

PSAX Mul-

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 1-1

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Conventions

Text Types Used in This Document

Table 1-1 shows how each typographical convention is used.

Table 1-1. Text Conventions

Appearance How it is used

SANS SERIF BOLD, ALL CAPS

Fixed-width normal Message text displayed on the user interface window

Serif bold • Button name (GUI interface) or command name

Fixed-width bold System prompts displayed on the user interface window

Serif italics • A variable name or string for which you will substi-

Labels on module panels, chassis faceplates, or other

hardware

(console interface) on the user interface window

• Literal text for values that the user types or selects

from predefined sets of values for fields

• Commands or literal argument values

tute your own information

• An argument or parameter on a command line for

which you will substitute your own information

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue1 Release10.0.0

1-2 255-700-686R10.0.0

Icons and Symbols

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Conventions

Follow all safety guidelines in this document to help prevent personal injury to you and damage to the PSAX system.

Standard icons and symbols to alert you to dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes are described as follows:

DANGER:

Warnings for a personal injury hazard are identified by this format.

WARNING:

Warnings relating to risk of equipment damage or failure are identified by this format.

CAUTION:

Warnings relating to risk of data loss or other general precautionary notes are identified by this format.

Note: Identifies additional information pertinent to the text preceding

this note.

Command Description Tables

All illustrations for configuration windows in this guide for the PSAX system console interface are followed by a command description table describing the command functions displayed on the window (near the bottom of the window). You should read all the information in the command description table, especially when first using a window, because these descriptions may have special instructions or configuration constraints provided in the Function column by use of the

Table 1-2. Command Description Table Example

Command Function

Bring All Interfaces Into Service

Brings the out-of-service configured interfaces to in-service status.

Note: In GR-303 configuration, it is critical to bring into service only those channels actively configured with DS1 ports.

Field Description Tables

For all illustrations for configuration windows in this guide for both the PSAX system console interface and the EMS-PSAX, the field description tables normally follow the command description tables. Field description tables define the editable and the display-only fields, their functions, valid values, and constraints, if applicable. As in the command description tables,

Note: text convention is also used, where appropriate, in the field descrip-

the tion tables to alert the user to special instructions or configuration constraints (see Figure 1-1).

Note: text convention (see Table 1-2).

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 1-3

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Conventions

Identifies editable fields or display-only fields on screens

Identifies initial field value default

Describes the function of the field and special instructions for configuring modules

Field Name Field Values Description

Interface Type Default: 0

Range: 0-22 Format: Numeric

Specifies the type of end-to-end connection protocol that governs the transmission parameters for this configured port and channel interface. Note: When certain types of interfaces are selected in this field, other configuration fields are displayed on this window.

Identifies available range for field value when applicable

Figure 1-1. Field Description Table Example

Identifies field value format as Numeric, Predefined Alphanumeric, Hexadecimal, or Valid Dotted Quad.

Selecting Options, Fields, and Commands

Follow these guidelines to select an option, field, or command on the PSAX console interface windows and to navigate through the windows:

• To select an option, field, or command, do one of the following: ~ Press the Up, Down, Left, or Right Arrow to highlight (reverse video

image) the option name, field name, or command you want to select and press Enter as many times as necessary until the field choice you want is displayed.

~ Use the alternate keys, K=UP, H=LEFT, L=RIGHT to highlight (reverse

video image) the option name, field name, or command you want to select and press Enter. (You can optionally redefine these alternate keys from the User Options window, which is accessible from the Console Interface Main Menu window.)

~ To quickly select a command, you can also simultaneously press Ctrl and

the letter underlined in the command.

Once an option name, field, or command is selected, the system responds as described in Table 1-3.

Decribes special instructions or configuration constraints

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue1 Release10.0.0

1-4 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Table 1-3. System Responses to Selecting Options, Fields, or Commands

For a selected... the following occurs:

option name The window corresponding to the option name is displayed.

field The following variations occur:

• The field entry area is blank or contains the default or previously

entered value. Press Enter to enter or change data in this field. Press Enter again to exit edit mode.

• The field entry area, like the field name, is displayed in reverse video

image and contains a predefined set of values, which you can view or select by pressing Enter to navigate forward through these values. To navigate backward through these field values, press Ctrl+H or the Backspace key.

Read-only fields, which you cannot change, are enclosed in square brackets (example: [LineStatus]).

command The following variations occur:

• A message in the information line indicating an error or successful com-

pletion of the command is displayed.

• The next higher level or previous window (window name) is displayed.

• The next lower level or succeeding window (window name) is displayed.

Help Information

• To navigate through the Console windows, use the shortcuts listed in

Table 1 - 4.

Table 1-4. Shortcut Keys for Navigating Console Interface Windows

If you want to... press...

redisplay the previous window Ctrl+B on the window.

redisplay the Console Interface Main Menu window Ctrl+G on the window.

refresh the window Ctrl+R on the window.

On all the PSAX system windows, each command or menu option has an underlined letter. The control key plus an underlined letter is a shortcut to that command or menu option. You can use the navigation keys and hotkeys with the Caps Lock key on or off. Always observe the status line at the bottom of the window for instructions and information.

Help Information

The Help windows are accessible from any window in the PSAX system console interface. To access the Help windows, press the ? (Question Mark) key on any window. In addition to the Help windows, the Console Interface windows display contextual help in the information line at the bottom of each window. Contextual help provides information about the command or field currently highlighted on that window. The information line also displays error codes and responses to commands. All responses and notifications are

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 1-5

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Help Information

recorded in a trap log. See the PacketStar® PSAX Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Trap Reference Guide for details on displaying the trap log and

obtaining explanations of the trap messages.

To view the Help windows from the Console Interface Main Menu window, perform the following procedure.

Begin

1 On the window for which help is desired, press the ? (question mark)

key.

The Help window for the current console window is displayed (see Figure 1-2).

Your site name appears here after initial configuration

Information Line

Figure 1-2. Main Menu Help Window

2 To display the remaining Help windows for the current console window,

press the Down Arrow key.

3 To scroll backward through the Help windows for the current console

window, press the Up Arrow key.

4 To exit Help and return to the current console window, press the Enter

key.

End

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue1 Release10.0.0

1-6 255-700-686R10.0.0

Technical Support

If you experience a problem with the PSAX system, refer to the Lucent Technologies Product Warranty Registration Information, which accompanied your

shipment, for instructions on obtaining support in your area.

About Lucent Technologies

History

Lucent Technologies is the communications systems and technology company formed through the restructuring of AT&T. We bring with us a tradition of more than 125 years of experience and a dedication to superior customer service.

Lucent Technologies manufactures, sells, and services a complete line of customer premises communications units, and commercial and multimedia communications and messaging systems designed and supported by our research and development unit, Bell Laboratories.

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Technical Support

Our legacy and our spirit of innovation allow Lucent to provide our customers with the tools needed to communicate effectively, any time and anywhere, and to integrate the latest technologies into real-life solutions that help make business work.

For More Information

To learn more about the PacketStar PSAX family of Multiservice Media Gateways and the complete line of Lucent Technologies products, visit our Web site at http://www.lucent.com.

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family

Lucent Technologies provides a complete range of PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways in the PacketStar PSAX family.

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway is designed to provide a full range of central office-based multiservice media gateway functions in a small, competitively-priced package suitable for customer premise deployment. Ideal for central office, large enterprise, or wireless cell site multiservice media gateway applications, the PSAX 1000 system provides highly reliable network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 1-7

Chapter 1 Getting Started

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 1000 system provides up to 630 Mbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 630 Mbps.

Supporting up to five slots (19–inch chassis) for I/O and server modules—with a full range of interfaces such as DS0A, DS1/E1, DS3/E3, OC-3, OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4c, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and serial—the PSAX 1000 system is a cost-effective access switch solution for connecting to legacy equipment.

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway is designed to provide a full range of central office-based multiservice ATM access functions. Ideal for the central office or a large enterprise’s multiservice media gateway, the PSAX 1250 system provides highly reliable network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 1250 system provides up to 600 Mbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 600 Mbps.

Supporting 10 slots (19-inch chassis) or 14 slots (23-inch chassis) for I/O and server modules—with a full range of interfaces such as DS0A, DS1/E1, DS3/E3, OC-3, OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4c, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and serial—the PSAX 1250 system is a cost-effective access switch solution for interworking with legacy equipment.

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway offers carrier-grade, high-density multiservice ATM access functions. Designed as the multiservice media gateway for the central office or for a large enterprise customer, the PSAX 2300 system provides network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 2300 system provides up to 1.9 Gbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 1.9 Gbps.

Supporting 15 slots for I/O and server modules—with provisions for OC-3, OC-3c/STM-1, and OC-12c/STM-4c interfaces with 1:1 protection, 1:1 DS1 module protection switching, and a full range of interfaces such as DS0A, DS1/E1, DS3/E3, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and serial—the PSAX 2300 system solves demanding and diverse network design challenges with ease.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue1 Release10.0.0

1-8 255-700-686R10.0.0

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway provides carrier-class reliability, with an unmatched range of service capabilities, end-to-end traffic prioritization, “any-service, any-channel” flexibility, and breakthrough voice technology. Ideal for the central office or a large enterprise multiservice media gateway, the PSAX 4500 system provides highly reliable network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 4500 system provides up to 4.2 Gbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 4.2 Gbps.

The high-performance midplane design supports 15 interface slots. Module protection for two groups of four or six multiport DS3, STS-1e, or E3 modules is provided via an N:1 protection scheme using rear access line interface modules. The protection module provides backup so that on the failure of any one of the modules in a group, traffic is maintained. A single PSAX 4500 system at the edge of the carrier network can transition traffic from a large number of network customers over high-speed DS1/E1 IMA, DS3/E3, OC-3, OC-3c/STM-4c, and OC-12c/STM-4c trunks into the ATM core, managing the whole quickly and efficiently, down to the individual permanent virtual circuit.

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Comments on This Guide

Through the use of the latest DSP voice technology, the PSAX 4500 system supports advanced voice traffic over ATM (VToA) services for up to 6048 DS0 channels. As a multiservice media gateway—with H.248 call control, CAS, PRI, GR-303, and V5.2 protocols, 3-Port DS3/STS-1e, 1-Port OC-3/STM-1 CES, and Tones and Announcements modules—the PSAX 4500 system provides packet solutions for voice over xDSL, trunking, tandem, and PRI offload switching.

Comments on This Guide

To comment on the PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, please complete the comment card at the following web address: http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/

You can also email your comments to comments@lucent.com.

Include the following information:

Title: PacketStar Release number: Release 10.0.0 Document number: 255-700-686R10.0.0 Issue number: Issue 1 Publication date: December 2004

PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 1-9

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Comments on This Guide

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue1 Release10.0.0

1-10 255-700-686R10.0.0

2 Hardware Description

Overview of This Chapter

This chapter describes the features and specifications of the chassis and common equipment modules for the following PacketStar Media Gateways:

• PSAX 1000

• PSAX 1250

• PSAX 2300

• PSAX 4500

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

System Features

The PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway system, a member of the Lucent Technologies PacketStar PSAX product line, provides high-capacity, universal connectivity over an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) wide area network (WAN).

The PSAX 1000 system provides high-density DS3/E3 access to the ATM network at hubs (wireless and wired); broadband access; channelized DS3/STS-1e at the toll, tandem, and access switch to the telephony network; fiber optic (OC-3c/STM-1) access for an ATM edge switch; CDMA soft handoff; and connection to SONET/SDH ready ATM network elements (for example, large routers). The PSAX 1000 system focuses on providing a highly reliable carrier-class, multiservice access switch that can be deployed at the ATM network edge to carry voice, data, and video. The PSAX 1000 system includes a high-capacity midplane architecture that allows for 1:1 DS3/E3/STS-1e protection and OC-3/STM-1 trunking. The system capacity for switched traffic is up to approximately 630 Mbps in a fully redundant, mostly nonblocking design.

PSAX Multiservice

System Hardware Components

The PSAX 1000 base system includes the following hardware components (see Figure 2-1):

• Chassis—43.5 cm (17.13 in.) wide chassis with flush mounting brackets for

48.26 cm (19 in.) equipment racks

• Stratum 3–4/-48 V dc Power Supply module, Stratum 3–4/24 V dc Power

Supply module, or Stratum 3–4/110/220 V ac Power Supply module—two each for redundant AC or DC power and transmit timing control

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-1

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

• Fan/Alarm module—one to supply clean air, component cooling, and external alarm interface

The following items are ordered separately to complete the configuration of the PSAX 1000 system:

• Central processing unit (CPU3 or CPU3L) module with the appropriately installed system software release (see your Lucent Technologies account manager for ordering information)

• Input/output (I/O) and server modules (see your Lucent Technologies account manager for ordering information)

• Blank faceplate modules—required for empty I/O and server slots

• Agency-approved AC power cordsets—Agency-approved AC power cord-

sets must be ordered separately for the Stratum 3–4/110/220 V ac Power Supply module

Figure 2-1. PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

Chassis Hardware

The PSAX 1000 chassis is 48.26-cm (19-in.) wide by 8.9 cm (3.5 in.) high by

36.8 cm (14.5 in.) deep and can be rack- or wall-mounted with the appropri-

ate mounting brackets. It is designed to support two CPU3 modules, two Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules (24 or -48 V dc or 110/220 V ac), and two Line Interface modules (future enhancement), for redundant operation. Up to four I/O or server modules can also be installed to complete the configuration.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-2 255-700-686R10.0.0

Module Slot Locations

The chassis has seven front-panel slots for the CPU3 or CPU3L, I/O, server, and Fan/Alarm modules (see Figure 2-2). It also includes a safety ground point for an anti-static wrist strap.

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

Slot 3

Slot 2 Slot 1

Figure 2-2. Front View of the PSAX 1000 Chassis

The rear panel has two slots for line interface modules (for future enhancements) and two slots for the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules (see Figure 2-3). It also includes two 24 or -48 V dc power connections for the Stratum 3–4/24 V dc Power Supply or Stratum 3–4/-48 V dc Power Supply module and two external clock input connections for all of the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules.

BITS Slot 22

BITS Slot 21

Connector

Slot 4

PS Slot 24 Connector

Slot 15 Slot 16

Fan/Alarm Module

LIM Slot 4 LIM Slot 3

PS Slot 23 Connector

Notes: PS Slot 23/24 connectors provide -48Vdc and 24Vdc power

Power Supply Slot 23

Stratum Slot 21

Power Supply Slot 24

Stratum Slot 22

Figure 2-3. Rear View of the PSAX 1000 Chassis

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-3

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

Midplane

The chassis midplane distributes data, clock signals, and power to the I/O, server, and common equipment modules. The dual-bus (A/B) architecture of the midplane provides several layers of protection for system resources and functionality. In conjunction with the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules, this architecture provides the basic ATM concentration technologies of the PSAX 1000 system. The bus design provides approximately 630 MBps total bandwidth and allows “hot swapping” of common equipment modules, and I/O and server modules. The midplane is based entirely on switching ATM cells.

Blank Faceplates

Blank faceplates must be inserted in all empty slots for optimum EMI shielding and cooling. Specific blank faceplates, the LIM blank faceplate and Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module blank faceplate are available for the LIM slots and the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply slots on the rear panel. I/O and server blank faceplates are available for the front panel slots (see the

PacketStar

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway Installation Guide for details).

Chassis Specifications

The chassis specifications for the PSAX 1000 chassis are given in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1. PSAX 1000 Chassis Hardware Specifications

Specification Description

Front panel slot configuration 6 slots: up to 5 slots (without second CPUn) for user-selected

I/O and server modules, up to 2 slots (without fifth I/O and server modules) for CPU3 or CPU3L modules, and 1 slot for Fan/Alarm module (see Figure 2-2)

Rear panel slot configuration 4 slots: 2 slots for Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules and 2

slots for LIM blank faceplates (see Figure 2-3)

Dimensions 8.9 cm H x 43.5 cm W x 36.8 cm D

(3-1/2 in. H x 17-1/8 in. W x 14-1/2 in. D) Rack Unit Height: 2

Weight

Material Pre-galvanized steel

Color Black

Ventilation Forced air using three variable-speed fans

Connections Refer to specific module specifications in this guide for details

Empty: 5.43 kg (11.98 lb.) Fully populated: 11.1 kg (24.4 lb.)

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-4 255-700-686R10.0.0

System Environmental Specifications

The environmental specifications for the PSAX 1000 system are described in Table 2 - 2.

Table 2-2. PSAX 1000 System Environmental Specifications

Parameter Value

Operating temperature range

For AC-powered PSAX 1000 systems:

0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)

For DC-powered PSAX 1000 systems:

-20° to 60° C (-4° to 140° F) with a cold start minimum of 0° C (32° F)

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

Operating humidity range

Operating altitude range

Storage temperature range

Storage humidity range

5% to 85% relative humidity

60 meters (197 feet) below sea level to 4,000 meters (13,123 feet) above sea level

-40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)

0% to 90% noncondensing

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

System Features

The PacketStar PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway provides high-capacity, universal connectivity over an ATM wide area network (WAN).

Ideal for central office or large enterprise customer multi-services access concentration, the PSAX 1250 system provides highly reliable network access for TDM voice, frame relay, and ATM data applications. The PSAX 1250 I/O interfaces, which include 75 Bps to 30 Mbps serial, DS0A, T1/E1, DS3/E3/STS-1e, OC-3, OC-3c/STM-1, Ethernet, and 2-Wire Station/Office, are supported by a sophisticated package of features, such as PNNI (private network-node interface), ILMI (integrated local management interface), 1+1 APS (automatic protection switching), trunk alarming, and a SS7 signaling gateway interface. Echo cancellation and silence suppression features make the PSAX 1250 system to a true multi-service platform. Featuring a 600 Mbps ATM cell bus capacity, carrier-class reliability, the PSAX 1250 system is a costeffective access switch solution for connecting to legacy equipment.

System Hardware Components

The PSAX 1250 base systems include the following hardware components:

• 19-inch chassis (see Figure 2-4): ~ Chassis—48.26-cm (19-in.) chassis with mounting brackets for 48.26 cm

(19 in.) or 58.2 cm (23 in.) equipment racks

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-5

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

~ Power Supply modules: 110 V ac, 220 V ac, or -48 V dc—two each for

redundant operation

For AC Power Supply modules, agency-approved AC power cordsets must be ordered separately with the chassis.

~ Stratum 3–4 module—two each for redundant operation

FAIL

ACTIVE

SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL

234567891011122122 23 24

ACTIVE

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1

IMA

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1 IMA

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1 IMA

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1

ATM

IMA

LOS

Slots for User-Selected I/O Modules

Figure 2-4. PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway(19-in.)

FAIL

ACTIVE

ATM

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

CPU

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

LOAD

KEY KEY

FAIL

ACTIVE

CPU

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

LOAD

FAIL

ACTIVE

STRATUM

3 4

CLK LOS

ACTIVE

STRATUM

3 4

CLK LOS

ACTIVE

Power Supply

( AC )

non-redundant

DANGER:

HIGH VOLTAGE

AC INPUT 50/60 Hz

100-127 V ~ 5.0 A 200-250 V ~ 2.5 A

FAIL

Common Equipment Slots

WARNINGS:

SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE CONNECTING THIS MODULE

ENSURE FACILITY POWER IS COMPATIBLE WITH VOLTAGE RATING OF THIS MODULE

ATTACH POWER CORD ONLY WHEN UNIT IS FULLY SEATED IN CHASSIS

UNPLUG POWER CORD BEFORE REMOVING THIS MODULE

MULTIPLE POWER CONNECTIONS, DISCONNECT TWO POWER CORDS BEFORE SERVICING CHASSIS

FAIL

ACTIVE

Power Supply

( AC )

non-redundant

DANGER:

HIGH VOLTAGE

AC INPUT 50/60 Hz

100-127 V ~ 5.0 A 200-250 V ~ 2.5 A

WARNINGS:

SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE CONNECTING THIS MODULE

ENSURE FACILITY POWER IS COMPATIBLE WITH VOLTAGE RATING OF THIS MODULE

ATTACH POWER CORD ONLY WHEN UNIT IS FULLY SEATED IN CHASSIS

UNPLUG POWER CORD BEFORE REMOVING THIS MODULE

MULTIPLE POWER CONNECTIONS, DISCONNECT TWO POWER CORDS BEFORE SERVICING CHASSIS

• 23-inch chassis (see Figure 2-5): ~ Chassis—58.42-cm (23-in.) chassis with mounting brackets for 58.2 cm

(23 in.) equipment racks (supplied accessories includes brackets)

~ Power Supply module: -48 V dc—two each for redundant operation ~ Stratum 3–4 module—two each for redundant operation

FAIL

ACTIVE

SERIAL SERIAL

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1

SERIAL

IMA

LOS

DS1

IMA

LOS

DS1

ATM

IMA

LOS

ACTIVE

ATM

LOS

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

FAIL

ACTIVE

ATM

LOS

Slots for User-Selected I/O Modules

Figure 2-5. PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway (23-in.)

The following items are ordered separately to complete the configuration of the PSAX 1250 system:

FAIL

ACTIVE

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

LOAD

KEY

FAIL

ACTIVE

CPUCPU

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

LOAD

KEY

Power Supply

STRATUM

3 4

CLK LOS

3 4

CLK LOS

( -48 VDC )

non-redundant

CAUTION:

DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE CHANGING FUSE.

REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.

ATTENTION:

COUPER LE COURANT AVANT DE REMPLACER LE FUSIBLE. REMPLACER PAR UN FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE ET DE MEMES CARACTERISTIQUES NOMINALES.

7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A

ATTACH POWER CABLE ONLY WHEN UNIT IS FULLY SEATED IN CHASSIS

48V

RETURN

FRAME

21 22 23 24

FAILFAIL

ACTIVEACTIVEACTIVE

Power Supply

( -48 VDC )

non-redundant

CAUTION:

DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE CHANGING FUSE.

REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.

ATTENTION:

COUPER LE COURANT AVANT DE REMPLACER LE FUSIBLE. REMPLACER PAR UN FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE ET DE MEMES CARACTERISTIQUES NOMINALES.

7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A

ATTACH POWER CABLE ONLY WHEN UNIT IS FULLY SEATED IN CHASSIS

48V

RETURN

FRAME

FAIL

ACTIVE

VOICE

ENET

2WO

FAIL

Common Equipment Slots

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-6 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chassis Hardware

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

• Central processing unit (CPUn (n=2 or 4)) module with the appropriately

installed system software release. One is required for nonredundant operation. Two are required for active/standby operation. (see your Lucent Technologies account manager for ordering information)

• Input/output (I/O) and server modules (see your Lucent Technologies

account manager for ordering information).

• Blank faceplate modules—required for empty I/O and server slots

The PSAX 1250 system can support either one or two Stratum 3–4 modules, one or two power supply modules, and one or two CPUn modules, to obtain the desired redundancy of common system equipment.

The PSAX 1250 chassis consists of a slotted shelf, a backplane, two side pieces, and two honeycomb-patterned, electromagnetic interference (EMI) shields as the top and the bottom pieces. The chassis is available in 48.26-cm (19-in.) or 58.42-cm (23-in.) widths to fit standard equipment racks or telco frames. The 23-inch chassis supports only a -48 V dc power supply (not 110/220 V ac).

For mounting in a rack or frame, the chassis is shipped with mounting angle brackets attached to the sides. These brackets can be attached at three different positions on the side pieces to mount the chassis in different horizontal positions in a rack.

Module Slot Locations

The 48.26-cm (19-in.) PSAX 1250 chassis has 16 slots; the 58.42-cm (23-in.) chassis has 20 slots. In both sizes, four slots are reserved for the optionally redundant power supplies and the optionally redundant Stratum 3–4 modules. The remaining 12 or 16 slots can be filled with one or two CPUn modules and various I/O and server modules, selected on the basis of access concentration requirements.

The module slots in the PSAX 1250 system are numbered from left to right:

• Slots 1 through 12 (48.26-cm/19-in. chassis) or slots 1 through 16 (58.42-

cm/23-in. chassis) are provided for the CPUn modules and the userselected I/O and server modules

~ In the 48.26-cm (19-in.) chassis, the CPUn modules can be placed in any

~ In the 58.42-cm (23-in.) chassis, the CPUn modules can be placed in any

• Slots 21 and 22 contain the Stratum 3–4 modules

• Slots 23 and 24 contain the Power supply modules

unreserved (1 through 12) slot, but usually are placed in slots 11 and 12 (or just in slot 12 for a single-CPUn configuration)

unreserved (1 through 16) slot, but usually are placed in slots 15 and 16 (or just in slot 16 for a single-CPUn configuration, because I/O modules cannot be used in slot 16)

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-7

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

If redundant Stratum 3–4 and Power supply modules are not used, the slots designated for these modules must remain empty. Blank faceplates are required in all empty slots.

Backplane

The chassis backplane distributes data, clock signals, and power to the modules. The dual-bus (A/B) architecture of the backplane provides several layers of protection for system resources and functionality. In conjunction with the Stratum 3–4 modules, this architecture provides the basic ATM concentration technologies of the PSAX 1250 system. The dual-bus design provides

1.2 Gbps total bandwidth and allows live (power-supplied) insertion of primary and redundant common equipment modules, and input/output and server modules. The backplane is based entirely on switching ATM cells.

Figure 2-6 shows a 48.26-cm (19-in.) PSAX 1250 chassis with no modules installed. Note the enlarged insets showing the backplane connectors for the modules at the back of the chassis and the slot numbers at the front of the chassis.

Figure 2-6. PSAX 1250 48.26-cm (19-in.) Chassis Backplane

Figure 2-7 shows a 58.42-cm (23-in.) PSAX 1250 chassis with no modules installed.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-8 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

Figure 2-7. PSAX 1250 58.42-cm (23-in.) Chassis Backplane

Chassis Specifications

The specifications for the PSAX 1250 chassis are given in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3. PSAX 1250 Chassis Hardware Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration 48.26-cm (19-in.) chassis: 16 slots total—12 slots for CPUn modules and

user-selected I/O and server modules

58.42-cm (23-in.) chassis: 20 slots total—16 slots for CPUn modules and

user-selected I/O and server modules

Both chassis: 2 reserved slots for Stratum 3–4 modules

2 reserved slots for power supply modules

Dimensions 48.26-cm (19-in.) chassis: 48.26 cm wide x 26.67 cm deep x 17.78 cm high

(19 in. wide x 10.5 in. deep x 7 in. high)

58.42-cm (23-in.) chassis: 58.42 cm wide x 26.67 cm deep x 17.78 cm high

(23 in. wide x 10.5 in. deep x 7 in. high)

Rack Unit Height: 4

Weight

Material Aluminum

Color Black

Cooling method Forced air through the PSAX 1250 Fan Tray

48.26-cm (19-in.) chassis: 4.09 kg (9 lb) empty and approximately 13.62 kg

(30 lb) fully populated

58.42-cm (23-in.) chassis: 5.45 kg (12 lb) empty and approximately

15.89 kg (35 lb) fully populated

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-9

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

System Environmental Specifications

The environmental specifications for the PSAX 1250 system are described in Table 2 - 2.

Table 2-4. PSAX 1250 System Environmental Specifications

Parameter Value

Operating temperature range

0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)

Operating humidity range

Operating altitude range

Storage temperature range

Storage humidity range

5% to 85% relative humidity

60 meters (197 feet) below sea level to 4,000 meters (13,123 feet) above sea level

-40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)

0% to 90% noncondensing

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

System Features

The PacketStar PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway provides high-capacity, universal connectivity over an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) wide area network (WAN).

The PSAX 2300 system is a carrier-grade, high-density ATM multiservice media gateway that provides network access for TDM voice, frame relay, and ATM data applications. The PSAX 2300 system I/O interfaces are supported by a sophisticated package of features, such as PNNI (private network-node interface), ILMI (integrated local management interface), 1+1 APS (automatic protection switching) and 1+1 MSP (multisection protection), trunk conditioning, a connection gateway API, and redundant common equipment modules. Echo cancellation and silence suppression features make the PSAX 2300 a true multiservice platform. Featuring a 1.9 Gbps ATM cell bus capacity, carrier-class reliability, Supporting 15 slots for I/O and server modules—with provisions for OC-3, OC-3c/STM-1, and OC-12c/STM-4c interfaces with 1:1 protection, 1:1 DS1 module protection switching, and a full range of interfaces such as DS0A, DS1/E1, DS3/E3, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, and serial—the PSAX 2300 system solves demanding and diverse network design challenges with ease.

System Hardware Components

The PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway base system includes the following hardware components (see Figure 2-4):

• Chassis—17.5 in. chassis with mounting brackets for 48.26 cm (19 in.) or

58.2 cm (23 in.) equipment racks

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-10 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

• -48 V dc Power Supply module—two each for redundant operation

(includes cooling fan for power supply and chassis)

• Stratum 3–4 module—two each for redundant operation

The following items are ordered separately to complete the configuration of the PSAX 2300 system:

• Central processing unit (CPUn (n=2 or 4)) module with the appropriately

installed system software release (see your Lucent Technologies account manager for ordering information)

• Input/output (I/O) and server modules (see your Lucent Technologies

account manager for ordering information).

• Blank faceplate modules—required for empty I/O and server slots

I L

A C

I V

I L

I V

I L

I V

Enh

O S

er S

ply -48 V

F A

I L

I V

F A

-r e

I L

I V

O S

I L

I V

L O

I L

I V

A I

I L

I V

F A

C T

LK LO

CLK LOS

LAM

P TEST

LAM

P TEST

I L

DS3

I V

F A

er Su

-3

(

-48 V

)

-3

(

I L

)

l a

e r

-3

I V

)

h a

z a

r d

l a

e r

h a

z a

r d

-3

A I

)

T X

T I

I V

CPU

T H

E R

H E

E T

O A

E Y

o a

d k e

1 0

Figure 2-8. PacketStar PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-11

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

Chassis Hardware

The PSAX 2300 chassis is a dc-powered, fully redundant 19- or 23-inch rackmountable chassis. The physical dimensions are 17.5 inches wide, 15.75 inches high, and 12 inches deep. Cable management clips add another 1.5 in. to the front front of the chassis.

The chassis includes 17 front-panel slots for input/output (I/O) and server modules for customer traffic, redundant stratum system timing, and central processing units for control and configuration. Two -48 V dc Power Supply modules reside below the cable turndown loops and air filter compartment in the middle of the chassis. The rear panel provides power and ground terminations for the chassis and additional module slots for future enhancements.

The chassis includes a midplane printed circuit board (PCB) designed to provide an interface between the front and rear panel slots. This design supports N:1 protection for DS3, E3, and STS-1e modules while continuing to support over 30 legacy PSAX I/O and server modules.

The Power Supply and Stratum modules operate in a load-sharing mode, whereas the CPU4 modules operate in an active/standby mode. All modules are hot swappable.

Module Slot Locations

The module slots are accessible through the front of the chassis and provide slots for specific modules:

• Front panel slots include: ~ Slots 1 through 15 are provided for I/O and server modules that pass cus-

~ Slots 16 and 17 are located on the far right side of the chassis, and are

~ Slots A and B are located on the middle of the chassis, and are reserved

~ The bottom two slots only allow the -48 V dc Power Supply module to be

For optimum EMI shielding and proper ventilation, blank faceplate modules must be inserted into all empty slots.

Backplane

The chassis backplane distributes data, clock signals, and power to the modules. The backplane is based entirely on switching ATM cells. The backplane has three segments; each segment has two buses, Bus A and Bus B. The three-segment architecture of the backplane provides several layers of protection for system resources and functionality. In conjunction with the Stratum 3–4 modules, this architecture provides the basic ATM concentration technologies of the PSAX 2300 system. The design provides a maximum

tomer traffic.

reserved for the CPU4 or CPU2 modules.

for the Stratum 3–4 modules.

installed.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-12 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

3.9 Gbps total bandwidth and allows live (power supplied) insertion of primary and redundant common equipment modules, and input/output and server modules.

Chassis Specifications

The chassis specifications for the PSAX 2300 chassis are given in Table 2-5.

Table 2-5. PSAX 2300 Chassis Hardware Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration 19 module slots (15 for user-selected I/O and server modules, 2 for CPUn

modules, and 2 for Stratum 3–4 modules) and 2 Power Supply module slots

Dimensions 40.0 cm H x 44.7 cm W x 26.7 cm D

(15.75 in. H x 17.6 in. W x 10.5 in. D) Rack Unit Height: 9

Weight

Material Aluminum

Color Black

Ventilation Forced convection using two variable-speed fans (one per Power Supply

Empty: 8.17 kg (18.0 lb) Fully populated: 22.29 kg (49.1 lb)

module)

System Environmental Specifications

The environmental specifications for the PSAX 2300 system are described in Table 2 - 2.

Table 2-6. PSAX 2300 System Environmental Specifications

Parameter Value

Operating temperature range

Operating humidity range

Operating altitude range

Storage temperature range

Storage humidity range

0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)

5% to 85% relative humidity

60 meters (197 feet) below sea level to 4,000 meters (13,123 feet) above sea level

-40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)

0% to 90% noncondensing

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-13

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway

System Features

System Hardware Components

The PSAX 4500 base system includes the following hardware components (see Figure 2-4):

• Chassis—17.5 in. chassis with mounting brackets for 48.26 cm (19 in.) or

58.2 cm (23 in.) equipment racks (both mounting brackets are supplied)

• -48 V dc Power Supply module—two each for redundant operation (includes cooling fan for power supply and chassis)

• Stratum 3–4 module—two each for redundant operation

The following items are ordered separately to complete the configuration of the PSAX 4500 system:

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-14 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway

• Central processing unit (CPUn (n=2 or 4)) module with the appropriately

installed system software release (see your Lucent Technologies account manager for ordering information)

• Input/output (I/O) and server modules (see your Lucent Technologies

account manager for ordering information).

• Blank faceplates are required for empty I/O and server slots

Figure 2-9. PacketStar PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway

Chassis Hardware

The PSAX 4500 chassis is a dc-powered, fully redundant 19- or 23-inch rackmountable chassis. The physical dimensions are 17.5 inches wide, 15.75 inches high, and 15 inches deep. Cable turndowns add another 1.5 inches to the front and back for a functional depth of 18 inches.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-15

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway

The Power Supply and Stratum modules operate in a load-sharing mode, whereas the CPUn modules operate in an active/standby mode. All modules are hot swappable.

System level status indicators appear above the module slots to provide visual indications on the operational status of the common equipment modules. Additional status indicators also appear on the individual modules.

Module Slot Locations

Midplane

The module slots are accessible through the front and back of the chassis and provide slots for specific modules:

• Front panel slots include: ~ Slots 1 through 15 are provided for I/O and server modules that pass cus-

tomer traffic.

~ Slots 16 and 17 are located on the far right side of the chassis, and are

reserved for the CPUn modules.

~ Slots A and B are located on the middle of the chassis, and are reserved

for the Stratum 3–4 modules.

~ The bottom two slots only allow the -48 V dc Power Supply module to be

installed.

• Rear panel slots include: ~ Slot 14 is reserved for the PSAX 4500 Alarm module ~ Slots 3 through 12 are reserved for the LIM3–4 module

For optimum EMI shielding and proper ventilation, blank faceplate modules must be inserted into all empty slots.

The chassis midplane distributes data, clock signals, and power to the modules through a dual-bus architecture. The midplane provides module interconnections for all I/O, server, and common equipment modules through the front of the chassis.

The bus architecture is designed to be redundant. Users who want a fully redundant service must not exceed 4.8 Gbps for the chassis, and 1.2 Gbps for each midplane segment. If a Stratum module (switching fabric) were to fail or be removed, the 4.8 Gbps midplane switching would be maintained.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-16 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway

The maximum bus capacity of the system can be 9.6 Gbps in a nonredundant system configuration. When a nonprotected system is configured, both Stratum modules would be required to carry 4.8 Gbps each with each bus running at 1.2 Gbps. If a Stratum module (switching fabric) fails in this configuration, a gradual degradation occurs from 9.6 Gbps to 4.8 Gbps. Using quality of service (QoS) criteria, unspecified bit rate (UBR) traffic is affected first.

The midplane has four segments (see Figure 2-10): segment 1 includes slots 1–4, segment 2 includes slots 5–8, segment 3 includes slots 9–12, and segment 4 includes slots 13–17. The midplane contains two buses. This feature allows the use of high-performance, broadband modules throughout the chassis. When doing bandwidth calculations for a fully redundant architecture, assume that only one Stratum module is active and uses a bandwidth of

1.2 Gbps per segment.

A0 Bus

A1 Bus A2 Bus

STRATUM B

Slot 9

Slot 10

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Slot 1

Slot 2

B0 Bus

Slot 3

Slot 8

Slot 7

Slot 6

Slot 5

Slot 4

STRATUM A

B1 Bus B2 Bus

1.2 Gbps/Bus 1.2 Gbps/Bus1.2 Gbps/Bus 1.2 Gbps/Bus

Segment 2 Segment 3Segment 1 Segment 4

Figure 2-10. Data Flow Through the PSAX 4500 Midplane

Chassis Specifications

The chassis specifications for the PSAX 4500 chassis are given in Table 2-7.

Table 2-7. Chassis Hardware Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration Front panel: 19 module slots (15 for user-selected I/O and

server modules, 2 for CPUn modules, and 2 for Stratum 3–4 modules) and 2 Power Supply module slots

Rear panel: 10 LIM3–4 module slots and 1 PSAX 4500

Alarm module slot

Dimensions 40.0 cm H x 44.7 cm W x 45.7 cm D

(15.75 in. H x 17.6 in. W x 18.0 in. D) Rack Unit Height: 9

Weight

Empty: 10.2 kg (22.4 lb) Fully populated: 22.68 kg (50 lb)

A3 Bus

Slot 14

B3 Bus

Slot 15

Slot 17 CPU2

Slot 16 CPU2

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-17

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Table 2-7. Chassis Hardware Specifications (Continued)

Specification Description

Material Aluminum

Color Black

Ventilation Forced convection using two variable-speed fans (one per

Power Supply module)

System Environmental Specifications

The environmental specifications for the PSAX 4500 system are described in Table 2 - 8.

Table 2-8. System Environmental Specifications

Parameter Value

Operating temperature range

0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)

Operating humidity range

Operating altitude range

Storage temperature range

Storage humidity range

5% to 85% relative humidity

60 meters (197 feet) below sea level to 4,000 meters (13,123 feet) above sea level

-40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)

0% to 90% noncondensing

Common Equipment Modules

The PSAX common equipment modules provide power conversion and protection, clock control, system configuration and control, traffic switching and protection, and facility alarm and control as described in the following sections.

PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply Modules

The PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules includes a power supply component for power conversion and distribution, a timing control component for system synchronization, and a sensor for system temperature control. Power and transmit clock sources are provided through the following modules:

• Stratum 3–4/-48 V dc Power Supply module

• Stratum 3–4/110/220 V ac Power Supply module

• Stratum 3–4/24 V dc Power Supply module

The Stratum 3–4 component is identical on each module.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-18 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Module Placement For redundant operation, the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules are

installed in the rear-panel slots labeled

and STRATUM SLOT 22/POWER SUPPLY SLOT 24.

STRATUM SLOT 21/POWER SUPPLY SLOT

For nonredundant operation, the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply modules must be installed in the slot labeled

STRATUM SLOT 21/POWER SUPPLY SLOT 23 and

the PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module blank faceplate must be installed in the slot labeled

STRATUM SLOT 22/POWER SUPPLY SLOT 24.

In the console Equipment Configuration window, the module is displayed as two modules (slots 21 and 22 for the Stratum 3–4 component and slots 23 and 24 for the Power Supply component).

Note: Lucent does not support configurations involving two different

types of power supplies being installed in the PSAX 1000 chassis.

-48 V dc Power Supply Component

The module (see Figure 2-11) converts -48 V dc power to voltages required by the system for normal operation and distributes power through the midplane to all of the modules in the chassis. Status indicators (indicating the operational state of the module) and fused circuit protection are also included in the design of the module. The DC power connection is located on the rear-panel of the chassis.

The chassis has two slots on the rear panel for two modules that operate in a load-sharing, one-for-one redundant mode to increase system reliability. This configuration ensures that as long as one module is active, all the modules are fully powered. In a redundant configuration, each module normally runs at one-half of its capacity. If one module fails, the other module takes over completely (when appropriate, separate independent power sources (commercial and backup power) of the same voltage should be used in redundant power applications).

Figure 2-11. PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/-48 V dc Power Supply Module

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-19

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

110/220 V ac Power Supply Component

The module (see Figure 2-12) has an autosensing power supply that automatically allows either 110 V ac or 220 V ac power to be connected without any intervention, and converts alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC) for the system. Power is distributed through the midplane to all of the modules in the system. Status indicators (indicating the operational state of the module) and an AC power connector (with fused circuit protection) are also included in the design of the module.

Note: With this module, you must use an agency-approved shielded AC

power cordset, with a ferrite core attached, to meet emission requirements. If you do not have the appropriate cordset, contact your Lucent Technologies account manager.

Figure 2-12. PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/110/220 V ac Power Supply Module

24 V dc Power Supply Component

The module (see Figure 2-13) converts 24 V dc power to voltages required by the system for normal operation and distributes power through the midplane to all of the modules in the chassis. Status indicators (indicating the operational state of the module) and fused circuit protection are also included in the design of the module. The DC power connection is located on the rear-panel of the chassis.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-20 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

completely (when appropriate, separate independent power sources (commercial and backup power) of the same voltage should be used in redundant power applications).

Figure 2-13. Stratum 3–4/24 V dc Power Supply Module

Chassis Throughput Each Stratum 3–4 component supports a single bus and furnishes 600 Mbps

of ATM bandwidth. Although the system can operate with one module, two modules yield the maximum system throughput of 1.2 Gbps and offer redundancy to protect service in case one module fails. With both modules in service, the I/O modules use both midplane buses. If one module fails, all the I/O modules use the bus from the remaining module, but system throughput is reduced by half, that is, to 600 Mbps.

Timing Control The module provides the following timing modes: ANSI or ITU composite

clock (64 kHz), T1BITS (1.55 MHz) or E1ETSI (2.048 MHz) external timing, line timing, and Stratum 3+ internal freerun timing. With the ability to accept a timing reference from a variety of interfaces at low transmission rates, the system provides the network with a reliable transport and access infrastructure.

The module supports a primary (active) timing source and a secondary (backup) timing source based on any of the timing modes and automatically switches from primary to secondary in the event the primary source fails due to clock loss or excessive frequency offset conditions. When both primary and secondary references (composite clock, BITS, or line timing modes) fail due to clock loss or excessive frequency offset, the module enters a holdover or freerun mode to maintain synchronization. If the external source does not return to normal operation after the module enters the holdover mode, the module will enter the Freerun mode.

The internal timing source of the module meets Stratum 3+ requirements as specified in the GR-1244-CORE and ITU-T G.813 Option I standards. The timing source allows the system to operate after losing external synchronization for as long as 24 hours without synchronization problems.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-21

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

The module accepts the following external timing sources:

• Composite clock meeting ANSI T1.101 and ITU-T G.703 standards

• BITS clock meeting Bellcore GR-518-CORE (DS1) and ITU-T G.812 (E1)

standards

The module provides the following timing modes: ANSI or ITU composite clock (64 kHz), T1BITS (1.55 MHz) or E1ETSI (2.048 MHz) external timing, line timing, and Stratum 3 internal freerun timing. With the ability to accept a timing reference from a variety of interfaces at low transmission rates, the system provides the network with a reliable transport and access infrastructure.

The module supports a primary (active) timing source and a secondary (backup) timing source based on any of the timing modes and automatically switches from primary to secondary in the event the primary source fails due to excessive frequency offset conditions. When both primary and secondary references (composite clock, BITS, or line timing modes) fail due to excessive frequency offset, the module enters a holdover or freerun mode to maintain synchronization. If the frequency offset remains excessive after the module enters the holdover mode, the module will enter the Freerun mode.

The internal timing source of the module meets Stratum 3 requirements as specified in the GR-1244-CORE and ITU-T G.813 Option I standards. The timing source allows the system to operate after losing external synchronization for as long as 24 hours without synchronization problems.

The module accepts the following external timing sources:

• Composite clock meeting ANSI T1.101 and ITU-T G.703 standards

• BITS clock meeting Bellcore GR-518-CORE (DS1) and ITU-T G.812 (E1)

standards

Line Timing Sources The line timing mode synchronizes to any I/O module port with a terminated

synchronous source, while not affecting the traffic on the port. In line timing mode, the system obtains its synchronization source, through the Stratum 3–4 module, from any of its interfaces

except the following

modules:In line timing mode, the system obtains network clock synchronization, through the Stratum 3–4 component, from any of its interfaces

except

the following modules:

20N32 4-Port Voice 2-Wire Office

23N40 4-Port Ethernet

20N30 8-Port Voice 2-Wire Station

24N64 12-Port Medium-Density DS1/E1/DS0A CES

(When operating in DS0A mode only)

45N79 PSAX 4500 Alarm

20N79 Alarm

23N27 DSP2C Voice Server

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-22 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

23N29 DSP2D Voice Server

23N26 DSP2E Voice Server

23N25 DSP2F Voice Server

23N41 Enhanced Router

20N40 Ethernet

20N41 Route Server

23N28 Tones and Announcements Server

Common Equipment Modules

Redundant System Timing

Timing Source Failures

Two Stratum 3–4 modules are supported as two independent synchronization sources in a redundant configuration. Each module operates independently such that any one module can provide the system timing in the event the other one malfunctions or is removed. The modules are provisioned through the user interfaces (console and EMS-PSAX).

Switching between the modules is nonrevertive. All provisioned references on both primary and secondary modules are continuously monitored for failures. The composite clock is considered failed based on:

• Incorrect bipolar violation density that departs from the 1-in-8 pattern

• Loss of signal

• Out of frequency range

The BITS clock is considered failed based on:

• Loss of signal

• Loss of frame

• Line AIS

• Out of frequency range

A switch between timing references occurs no later than the declaration of the failure. The module automatically recovers from holdover (or internal freerun timing) to its original reference or secondary input port when a suitable reference signal is available.

Chassis Temperature Control

The module monitors the output air temperature of the chassis in conjunction with the PSAX 1000 Fan/Alarm module temperature sensor to maintain a consistent temperature inside the chassis. Refer to “PSAX Alarm Modules” on page 2-41 for additional information on how the PSAX 1000 Fan/Alarm module and the PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module regulate the chassis temperature.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-23

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Trap Messages The module notifies the CPU3 module of common equipment status so that

the CPU can generate trap messages that identify the status and operation of the module and chassis. Trap messages can be viewed on the Trap Log Display window of the console interface or the AQueView window.

PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power

The PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module specifications are given in Table 2-9.

Supply Module Specifications

Table 2-9. PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply Module Specifications

Specification Description

General Information

Slot Configuration Two dedicated slots on rear panel, Slots labeled STRATUM

SLOT 21/POWER SUPPLY SLOT 23 SLOT 24

and STRATUM SLOT 22/POWER SUPPLY

Dimensions 4.8 cm H x 12.7 cm D x 21.1 cm W

(1-15/16 in. H x 5 in. D x 8-5/16 in. W)

Weight 0.85 kg (1.88 lb)

Units per system

For redundant operation: two are required.

For nonredundant operation: one module and one

Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module blank faceplate are required

-48 V dc Power Supply Component Information

Power • Input voltage range: -42.5 to -56.5 V dc

•

Rated input current: 5.0 A maximum per module

• Maximum input power: 181 W (618 BTU/hr) maximum per chasis

Maximum output power: 135 W (461 BTU/hr)

•

Circuit protection: 1 fuse, 7.5 A at 125 V dc, wire-type fast acting

black/white, alarm indicating

Connections 2-pin connector on chassis rear panel (one per module)

24 V dc Power Supply Component Information

Power • Input voltage range: 20–30 V dc (nonredundant) and 18–30 V dc

(redundant)

Rated input current: 10 A maximum per module

•

Maximum input power: 213 W (727 BTU/hr) maximum per chassis

•

Maximum output power: 160 W (546 BTU/hr)

Circuit protection: 1 fuse, 15 A at 125 V dc, wire-type fast acting

•

red/blue, alarm indicating

Connections 2-pin connector on chassis rear panel (one per module)

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-24 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Table 2-9. PSAX 1000 Stratum 3–4/Power Supply Module Specifications (Continued)

Specification Description

110/220 V ac Power Supply Component Information

Power • Input voltage range: 100–127 or 200–240 V ac (autosensing)

•

Rated input current: 2.5 A (100–127 V ac) or 1.5 A (200–240 V ac)

maximum per module

Maximum input power: 245 W (836 BTU/hr) maximum per chassis

•

Maximum output power: 186 W (635 BTU/hr)

•

Input frequency: 50 or 60 Hz

Circuit protection: 2 fuses, 2.5 A at 250 V, fast-acting cartridge,

•

5x20 mm

Connections 3-pin IEC connector in module

PSAX 1250 Power Supply Modules

Three types of power supply modules are available for the PSAX 1250:

• 110 V ac Power Supply module (supports only the 19-inch chassis)

• 220 V ac Power Supply module (supports only the 19-inch chassis)

• -48 V dc Power Supply module (supports both chassis)

The Power Supply modules (see Figure 2-14) distribute power to the backplane and all of the modules in the chassis. Slots 23 and 24 are reserved for the Power Supply modules. Each module includes status indicators and a power connection. The -48 V dc Power Supply module includes inline circuit protection on the faceplate. When using the AC Power Supply modules, circuit protection must be supplied by the customer.

Note: In order to use the 220 V ac Power Supply module, you must order

a suitable AC power cordset for use in your geographic location. For your convenience, Lucent Technologies has made a variety of international cordsets available for ordering. See your Lucent Technologies account manager for ordering details.

In a redundant configuration, two power supply modules operate in a loadsharing mode to increase system reliability. This configuration ensures that as long as one power supply module is active, all other modules are fully powered. When two power supply modules are installed, each normally runs at one-half of its capacity. If one fails, the other Power Supply module takes over completely.

Note: A single 110 or 220 V ac power supply module may not fully

power the chassis, depending on which I/O modules are being used.

When the PSAX 1250 chassis is configured to operate in a -48 V dc environment, the -48 V dc power is supplied through the PSAX 1250 Fan Tray power supply cabling.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-25

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Three LED indicators on the faceplate provide status indications of the mod-

ule. Refer to the PacketStar

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway Installation

Guide for additional information.

Figure 2-14. PSAX 1250 110 Vac, 220 Vac, and -48 V dc Power Supply Modules

PSAX 1250 -48 V dc Power Supply

The specifications for the PSAX 1250 -48 V dc Power Supply module are found in Table 2-10.

Module Specifications

Table 2-10. -48 V dc Power Supply Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration Slot 23 or 24 or both (for redundant configuration)

Power

Voltage range: -42.5 to -56.5 V dc Rated current: 7.0 A maximum per module for the 19 in. chas-

sis and 9.0 A maximum per module for the 23 in. chassis

Maximum input power: 470 W (1605 BTU/hr) maximum per

19-in. or 23-in. chassis

Maximum output power: 400 W (1366 BTU/hr) Circuit protection: Three 7.5 A, wire-type fast acting

black/white, alarm indicating, fuses

Dimensions 17.3 cm H x 23.3 cm D x 5.4 cm W

(6.8 in. H x 9.2 in. D x 2.126 in. W)

Weight 1.14 kg (2.5 lb)

Units per system Two recommended for redundancy

Connector One 3-pin female connector on the faceplate

Wiring/Cabling Supplied through the PSAX 1250 Fan Tray.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-26 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

PSAX 1250 110 V ac Power Supply

The specifications for the PSAX 1250 110 V ac Power Supply module are found in Table 2-11.

Module Specifications

Table 2-11. 110 V ac Power Supply Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration Slot 23 or 24 or both (for redundancy)

Power •

Voltage range: 100 to 125 V ac at 50 to 60 Hz

•

Rated current: 5 A maximum per module

•

Maximum input power: 300 W (1024 BTU/hr) maximum per

chassis

Maximum output power: 250 W (854 BTU/hr)

•

Circuit protection: Customer supplied

•

Dimensions 15.75 cm H x 24.13 cm D x 5.4 cm W

(6.2 in. H x 9.5 in. D x 2.125 in. W)

Weight 1.14 kg (2.5 lb.)

Units per system Two recommended for redundancy

Connector One recessed 3-pin connector on faceplate (IEC 60320)

Wiring/Cabling Requires agency-approved AC power cordset

PSAX 1250 220 V ac Power Supply

The specifications for the PSAX 1250 220 V ac Power Supply module are found in Table 2-12.

Module Specifications

Table 2-12. 220 V ac Power Supply Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration Slot 23 or 24 or both (for redundancy)

Power Voltage range: 200 to 250 V ac at 50 to 60 Hz

Rated current: 2.5 A maximum per module Maximum input power: 300 W (1024 BTU/hr) maximum per

chassis

Maximum output power: 250 W (854 BTU/hr) Circuit protection: customer supplied

Dimensions 15.75 cm H x 24.13 cm D x 5.4 cm W

(6.2 in. H x 9.5 in. D x 2.125 in. W)

Weight 1.14 kg (2.5 lb.)

Units per system Two recommended for redundancy

Connector One recessed 3-pin connector on faceplate (IEC 60320)

Wiring/Cabling Requires agency-approved AC power cordset

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-27

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

PSAX 2300/PSAX 4500 Power Supply Module

Functional Desciption Two -48 V dc Power Supply modules (see Figure 2-15) converts -48 V dc

power to voltages required by the chassis for normal operation and distributes power through the midplane to all of the modules in the chassis. The modules are installed side-by-side below the cable turndown loops and air filter compartment. Each module includes a variable-speed fan for power supply and module cooling, status indicators, power connection to distribute power to the midplane, and inline circuit protection. Facility power and frame ground are connected to the chassis through the rear-panel connections.

The modules operate in a load-sharing mode to increase system reliability. This configuration ensures that as long as one Power Supply module is active, the entire system is fully powered. Under normal operation, each module operates at one-half of its capacity. If one Power Supply module fails, the other module takes over completely.

The variable-speed fans are controlled through the Stratum modules. The Stratum modules sense the chassis temperature and change the fan speed to maintain air flow and temperature through the chassis. The fan speed also increases when the other fan stops operating due to failure or removal.

Circuit protection is provided through two fuses (one for the -48 V dc side and one for the return side) located on the faceplate of the module.

Three LED indicators on the faceplate indicate the operational state of the module.

10 A

Figure 2-15. PSAX 2300/4500 -48 V dc Power Supply Module

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-28 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

PSAX 2300/4500

-48 V dc Power

The specifications for the PSAX 2300/4500 -48 V dc Power Supply module are given in Table 2-13.

Supply Module Specifications

Table 2-13. -48 V dc Power Supply Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot Configuration Two dedicated slots below module slots

Power

Voltage range: -42.5 to -56.5 V dc Rated current: 12.5 A maximum per module Maximum input power: 470 W (1605 BTU/hr) maximum per

chassis

Maximum output power: 400 W (1366 BTU/hr) Circuit protection: Two 10 A, wire-type fast acting, black/white

alarm indicating, fuses

Dimensions 9.55 cm H x 26.67 cm D x 21.27 cm W

(3.76 in. H x 10.50 in. D x 8.375 in. W)

Weight 2.37 kg (5.25 lb)

Units per system Two required for redundancy

Connector Two screw-type terminals on the rear panel

Wire/cable size (PSAX 4500)

Power feed: two pair of 5.3–3.3 mm

mended (#10 AWG wire requires the insulated cable clamps provided in the supplied accessories (PN 06-CC8122, 4 each).

Frame ground: up to 5.3 mm

(#10 AWG) stranded recom-

mended.

Wire/cable size (PSAX 2300)

Power feed: two pair of 3.3–2.1 mm

recommended

Frame ground: up to 5.3 mm

(#10 AWG) stranded recom-

mended.

(#10–12 AWG) recom-

(#12–14 AWG) stranded

PSAX 1250 Stratum 3–4 Module

Functional Description

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-29

The Stratum 3–4 module (see Figure 2-16) provides synchronization and monitoring for the PSAX 1250 system. This module supports the backplane bus and furnishes 600 Mbps of ATM bandwidth. In addition, the PSAX 1250 system can obtain network clock synchronization through the backplane from any of its I/O modules, external clock sources, or internal clock source.

With the ability to accept a timing reference from any physical interface at low transmission rates, the system provides the network with a reliable transport and access infrastructure. The Stratum 3–4 clock timing is accurate to Stratum 3 requirements, allowing the PSAX 1250 system to run freely, even after losing external synchronization, for as long as 24 hours without synchronization problems.

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

The Stratum 3–4 module is ITU-compliant and ANSI-compliant. The Stratum 3–4 module provide synchronization and common equipment monitoring for the PSAX 1250 system. Each Stratum 3–4 module supports a single bus and furnishes 600 Mbps of ATM bandwidth. Although the system can operate with one Stratum 3–4 module, two (in slots 21 and 22) yield the maximum system throughput of 1.2 Gbps and offer redundancy to protect service in case one module fails. With both Stratum 3–4 modules in service, the I/O modules use both backplane buses. If one Stratum 3–4 module fails, all the I/O modules use the bus from the remaining Stratum 3–4 module, but system throughput is reduced by half, that is, to 600 Mbps.

The faceplate of the Stratum 3–4 module has four LED indicators that provide operational status of the module.

FAIL

ACTIVE

CLK LOS

Figure 2-16. PSAX 1250 Stratum 3–4 Module

PSAX 1250 Stratum 3–4 Module

The specifications for the PSAX 1250 Stratum 3–4 module are given in Table 2 - 14.

Specifications

Table 2-14. Stratum 3–4 Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration Slot 21 or 22 or both (for redundant configuration)

Dimensions 15.75 cm H x 1.78 cm W x 24.13 cm D

(6.2 in. H x 0.7 in. W x 9.5 in. D)

Weight 0.02 kg (0.475 lb)

Units per system 2 recommended (redundant)

Power consumption 14 W per pair

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-30 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Table 2-14. Stratum 3–4 Module Specifications (Continued)

Specification Description

Synchronization source Line, internal, or external

Accuracy Stratum 3 or 4, selectable

External clock input ANSI/ITU-T Composite (64 kHz), T1BITS (1.544 MHz),

E1ETSI (2.048 MHz), and DS0A Composite (64 kHz).

Connector One RJ-12 (with either 120 ohm or 75 ohm termination)

PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 Module

Functional Description

The PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 module provides the following features:

• System level transmit timing (freerun, line timing, holdover, internal or

external sources)

• Miscellaneous system control and monitoring

• Backplane timing and cell switching

• System redundancy

This module clocks traffic between three backplane segments at a switching capacity of up to 1.9 Gbps in a nonredundant configuration.

The PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 ANSI-compliant module provides synchronization and common equipment monitoring for the PSAX 2300 system. While fulfilling the normal clock-timing role, the module also serves as a switch, connecting Stratum A to bus A and Stratum B to bus B on each of the three segments of the backplane. Therefore, each module supports one of the two buses that exists on each of the three segments. Given that a single bus segment operates at approximately 650 Mbps, then the aggregate for the three segments can be up to 1.95 Mbps. Although the system can operate with one active module, two modules provide the maximum of 3.9 Gbps of ATM bandwidth, and offer redundancy to protect service in case one module fails. With both modules in service, the installed PSAX I/O modules use all buses. If one module fails, all the I/O modules in the system use the bus from the remaining Stratum 3–4 module, and system throughput is reduced by half.

With the ability to accept a timing reference from any physical interface at low transmission rates, the PSAX 2300 system provides the network with a reliable transport and access infrastructure. The Stratum 3–4 module is accurate to Stratum 3 requirements, allowing the PSAX 2300 system to run freely even if the module loses external timing for as long as 24 hours, without synchronization problems.

The faceplate of the Stratum 3–4 module has four LED indicators that provide operational status of the module.

PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 Module

The specifications for the PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 module are given in Table 2 - 15.

Specifications

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-31

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Table 2-15. PSAX 2300 Stratum 3–4 Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration Front two middle slots labeled A and B

Dimensions 15.8 cm H x 1.6 cm W x 24.1 cm D

(6.2 in. H x 0.6 in. W x 9.5 in. D)

Weight 0.22 kg (0.5 lb)

Units per system 2 required for redundancy

Power consumption 12 W per pair

Synchronization source Internal or external

Accuracy Stratum 3 or 4, selectable

External clock input ANSI/ITU-T Composite (64 kHz), T1BITS (1.544 MHz),

E1ETSI (2.048 MHz), and DS0A Composite (64 kHz)

Connector One RJ-45 (with either 120 ohm or 75 ohm termination)

PSAX 4500 Stratum 3–4 Module

The PSAX 4500 Stratum 3–4 module provides the following features:

• System level transmit timing (freerun, line timing, holdover, internal or external sources)

• Miscellaneous system control and monitoring

• Midplane timing and cell switching

• System redundancy

This module clocks traffic between four midplane segments at a switching capacity of up to 9.6 Gbps in a nonredundant configuration.

Physical Features The module is installed in the front slots (slot

modules are required for optimal redundant operation. The faceplate contains several status indicators that provide operational status of the module (see Figure 2-17). An RJ-45 connection is also provide for an external clock input. A lamp test switch is available to verify the operation of the status indicators.

A or B) of the chassis. Two

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-32 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

FAIL

ACTIVE

STRATUM

TURBO

L0S

LAMP TEST

Figure 2-17. PSAX 4500 Stratum 3–4 Module

Timing Control The module provides the following timing modes: ANSI or ITU composite

The module accepts the following external timing sources:

• Composite clock meeting ANSI T1.101 and ITU-T G.703 standards

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-33

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

• BITS clock meeting Bellcore GR-518-CORE (DS1) and ITU-T G.812 (E1) standards

The module supports a primary (active) timing source and a secondary (backup) timing source based on any of the timing modes and automatically switches from primary to secondary in the event the primary source fails due to excessive frequency offset conditions. When both primary and secondary references (composite clock, BITS, or line timing modes) fail due to excessive frequency offset, the module enters a holdover or freerun mode to maintain synchronization. If the frequency offset remains excessive after the module enters the holdover mode, the module will enter the Freerun mode.

The module accepts the following external timing sources:

• Composite clock meeting ANSI T1.101 and ITU-T G.703 standards

• BITS clock meeting Bellcore GR-518-CORE (DS1) and ITU-T G.812 (E1)

standards

The line timing mode synchronizes to any I/O module port with a terminated synchronous source, while not affecting the traffic on the port. In line timing mode, the system obtains its synchronization source, through the Stratum 3–4 module, from any of its interfaces

except the following

modules:In line timing mode, the system obtains network clock synchronization, through the Stratum 3–4 component, from any of its interfaces

except

the following modules:

20N32 4-Port Voice 2-Wire Office

23N40 4-Port Ethernet

20N30 8-Port Voice 2-Wire Station

24N64 12-Port Medium-Density DS1/E1/DS0A CES

(When operating in DS0A mode only)

45N79 PSAX 4500 Alarm

20N79 Alarm

23N27 DSP2C Voice Server

23N29 DSP2D Voice Server

23N26 DSP2E Voice Server

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-34 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

23N25 DSP2F Voice Server

23N41 Enhanced Router

20N40 Ethernet

20N41 Route Server

23N28 Tones and Announcements Server

• Incorrect bipolar violation density that departs from the 1-in-8 pattern

• Loss of signal

• Out of frequency range

System Control and Monitoring

The BITS clock is considered failed based on:

• Loss of signal

• Loss of frame

• Line AIS

• Out of frequency range

The PSAX Stratum 3–4 module monitors and reports a number of conditions related to the operation of the chassis and common equipment modules through the status indicators on the front panel of the chassis and the CPUn module.

The reported conditions include the following categories:

• Minor alarms include the loss or failure of one of the clock inputs.

• Major alarms include: ~ Failure of one of the Stratum modules ~ Failure of one of the Power Supply modules ~ Failure of one of the CPUn modules ~ Failure of one of the fans ~ Loss of all clock inputs

• Critical alarms include:

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-35

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

~ Failure of both Stratum modules ~ Failure of both fans (exception - system shutdown)

The following information is reported through the console, Telnet, or EMS:

• Stratum Mode (normal, holdover, or internal freerun timing)

• Timing Mode (external, internal, or line timing)

• Time of most recent reference switch

• Input reference source currently in use

• Stratum module that is currently in use

• Condition of input reference source (normal, LOF, OOF, etc.)

If the module enters internal freerun timing because of excessive frequency offset on all references, an alarm is generated. This alarm states the cause as excessive frequency offset on all references.

The Stratum 3–4 module also monitors the internal chassis temperature and controls air flow by changing the speed of the -48 V dc Power Supply module fans.

Midplane Switching The chassis can be used in a variety of configurations, but not all configura-

tions are optimal because of its partially blocking switch architecture. For most configurations, the location of the I/O modules is not relevant because they do not consume all of the available bandwidth. However, in high performance systems (using multiple OC-3c or OC-12c modules) the knowledge of traffic flow can be helpful in getting the maximum bandwidth performance out of the chassis. The speed of the individual bus segments is relevant when determining maximum bandwidth. Since the chassis is scalable, the exact speed is determined by the mix of modules in each segment. Low-speed modules, like the 6-Port DS1 IMA module or 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice module, run at 600 Mbps, and high-speed modules, like the 3-Port Channelized DS3/STS-1e CES module or 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP Multimode module, run at 1.2 Gbps. Because of the bi-directional nature of the ATM buses used in the chassis, no more than half the bandwidth should be used from one bus to another to allow for return traffic.

While fulfilling the normal clock-timing role, the Stratum 3–4 module also serves as a cell switcher between the four segments of the midplane and two hyper-speed SERDES-capable modules as shown in Figure 2-18.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-36 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Slots 1-4

Segment 1 Segment 3

600 Mbps Single ATM Bus Scalable to

1.2 Gbps

Stratum Module A

9 Cells

Slots 5-8

Segment 2 Segment 4

600 Mbps Single ATM Bus Scalable to

1.2 Gbps

9 Cells

Figure 2-18. Stratum 3–4 Module Traffic Switcher

The chassis has four sets of buses, supporting slots 1–4, 5–8, 9–12, and 13–17 respectively. This allows for the use of high performance, broadband modules on either side of the chassis.

The only applicable rules for installing modules include:

• Do not mix high-speed modules with low-speed modules unless you are out of slots. The segments only operate at the low-speed rate when the modules are mixed.

• Do not allow more than half the bus bandwidth to cross from one segment to another unless you want to run without full redundancy. If your bandwidth is mostly CBR this should not be done.

• SERDES-capable modules should always be installed in slots 1 and 2 and are equivalent to high-speed modules.

9 Cells

325 Mbs

9 Cells

325

Mbs

9 Cells

Bidirectional 325 MbsBidirectional 325 Mbs

9 Cells

Slots 9-12

600 Mbps Single ATM Bus Scalable to

1.2 Gbps

9 Cells

Slots 13-17

600 Mbps Single ATM Bus Scalable to

1.2 Gbps

The module uses individual slot-based routing and queuing to minimize blocking and to facilitate congestion control. By separating the traffic flow into individual slot-based queues within the module (total of 47 queues), the chassis is able to best determine which cells to send on a segment in order to avoid congestion. Potential congestion is signaled backward (back pressured) to specific modules sending high-speed data to reduce the impact on blocking. Each queue inside the module is 9 cells deep. Each destination slot has 3 queues per plane associated with it: one from each of the 3 segments. There are two more queues for message and control traffic. The 17 slots are divided into four segments, segment 1 includes slots 1–4, segment 2 includes slots 5–8, segment 3 includes slots 9–12, and segment 4 includes slots 13–17.

System Redundancy The chassis supports redundant common equipment modules, including

CPUn modules, Stratum 3–4 modules, and Power Supply modules. Under normal conditions both Stratum modules share the load of controlling midplane data flow. One module is configured as the primary timing, system control, and monitor module, the other module is configured as the secondary or backup module.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-37

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

PSAX 1000 CPU3 Module

Functional Description

Operating in a non-load sharing, primary/standby mode, the CPU3 module (see Figure 2-20) provides the processing, switching, and storage functions for the PSAX 1000 system. With a RISC-based microprocessor, the module has the processing power to maintain data flow, perform numerical calculations, and manage PSAX 1000 provisioning functions. The module has a 256 MB compact flash system disk and 256 MB of SDRAM to support routing and signaling functions, forward error correction, processing of SVC connections, and management of network capabilities.

In a redundant configuration, when upgrading or removing the active module, the standby (backup) module becomes the active module, and the original active module becomes the standby module. This switchover is designed to minimize the time the equipment is down for maintenance.

The standby module supports complete console and SNMP interfaces, in the same way the active module supports them, except that the standby module does not allow any settings to be modified.

The module also provides a serial console port and two 10/100BASE-T Ethernet ports. The

ETHERNET1 port provides direct access to the CPU3 module to

configure and monitor the operation of the PSAX 1000 system. The

ETHERNET2 port provides an Ethernet bridge connection to an ATM connec-

tion (PVC VCC) for bidirectional communication from a local laptop to the network. The port is enabled through the Feature Turn ON/OFF Table (CpuBridge) and configured through the PVC Connection Configuration Menu > Cpu Ether Bridge VCC > Cpu Ethernet Bridge PVC Table.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-38 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

TIV

CPU3

STBY

CONSOLE

LINK TX/RX

ETHERNET 1

LINK TX/RX

ETHERNET 2

Figure 2-19. PSAX 1000 CPU3 Module

PSAX 1000 CPU3

The specifications for the CPU3 module are given in Table 2-16.

Module Specifications

Table 2-16. PSAX 1000 CPU3 Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration For nonredundant operation: Slot 16.

For redundant operation: Slot 16 for the active (primary) module

and Slot 15 for the standby (backup) module.

Dimensions 17.3 cm H x 2.4 cm W x 24.1 cm D

(6-13/16 in. H x 15/16 in. W x 9-1/2 in. D)

Weight 0.45 kg (1 lb)

Units per system 1 for nonredundant operation and 2 for redundant operation

Power consumption 16 W maximum

Processing RISC-based microprocessor

Memory 256 MB compact flash system disk

256 MB SDRAM

Connectors Two RJ-45 connectors labeled

RJ-12 connector labeled

ETHERNET1 and ETHERNET2 and one

CONSOLE

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-39

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

PSAX CPU4 Module

Functional Description

Operating in a non-load sharing, primary/standby mode, the CPU4 module (see Figure 2-20) provides the processing, switching, and storage functions for the PSAX systems. With a RISC-based microprocessor, the module has the processing power to maintain data flow, perform numerical calculations, and manage PSAX system provisioning functions. The module has a 512 MB compact flash system disk and 512 MB of SDRAM to support routing and signaling functions, forward error correction, processing of SVC connections, and management of network capabilities.

In a redundant configuration, when upgrading or removing the primary (active) module, the standby (inactive) module becomes the primary module, and the original primary module becomes the standby module. This switchover is designed to minimize the time the equipment is down for maintenance.

The standby module supports complete console and SNMP interfaces, in the same way the primary module supports them, except that the standby module does not allow any settings to be modified.

The module also provides a serial console port and two 10/100BASE-T Ethernet ports to configure and monitor the operation of the PSAX systems. The

ETHERNET2 port is reserved for future enhancements.

FAIL

TIV

STB

CONSOLE

ETHERNET 1

LINK

TX/RX

LINK

TX/RX

ETHERNET 2

Figure 2-20. PSAX CPU4 Module

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-40 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

PSAX CPU4 Module

The specifications for the PSAX CPU4 module are given in Table 2-17.

Specifications

Table 2-17. CPU4 Module Specifications

Specification Description

Slot configuration for

Slots 16 and 17 PSAX 2300 and PSAX 4500

Slot configuration for PSAX 1250

19 in.: Slots 11 and 12

23 in.: Slots 15 and 16

Dimensions 17.3 cm H x 2.4 cm W x 24.1 cm D

(6-13/16 in. H x 15/16 in. W x 9-1/2 in. D)

Weight 308.4 g (0.68 lb)

Units per system 1 for nonredundant operation and 2 for redundant operation

Power consumption 15 W maximum

Processing RISC-based microprocessor

Memory 512 MB compact flash system disk

512 MB SDRAM

Connectors Two RJ-45 connectors labeled

ETHERNET1 and ETHERNET2 (reserved

for future enhancements) and one RJ-12 connector labeled

CONSOLE

PSAX Alarm Modules

The following PSAX Alarm modules are available for the PSAX systems as indicated:

• PSAX 1000 Fan/Alarm module is used in the PSAX 1000 chassis only

• Alarm module is used in the PSAX 1250, PSAX 2300, and PSAX 4500 chas-

sis

• PSAX 4500 Alarm module is used in the PSAX 4500 chassis only

Module Placement PSAX 1000 Fan/Alarm Module

The Fan/Alarm module is installed in a dedicated slot to the right side of the module slots.

PSAX Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm Modules

The Alarm module can only be installed in the indicated slot for the following PSAX systems:

• Slot 11 of the 19-inch PSAX 1250 system

• Slot 14 of the 23-inch PSAX 1250 system

• Slot 14 of the PSAX 2300 system

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-41

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

• Slot 14 in the front panel of the PSAX 4500 system

The PSAX 4500 Alarm module is only installed in slot 14 of the PSAX 4500 rear panel. Do not attempt to install the Alarm module (model 20N79) in slot 14 on the front panel when the PSAX 4500 Alarm module is installed. Any PSAX I/O module, except the Alarm module (model 20N79), can be inserted in slot 14 opposite the rear-mounted PSAX 4500 Alarm module without impacting traffic.

WARNING:

Do not attempt to use the PSAX 4500 Alarm module (model 45N79) and Alarm module (model 20N79) in the PSAX 4500 chassis at the same time. Unpredictable results and damage to the modules will occur.

Functional Description

Unless otherwise indicated, the PSAX Alarm modules function as follows:

The PSAX 1000 Fan/Alarm module (see Figure 2-21) provides forced-air cooling, air filtration, external dry relay contact monitoring sensors, visible and audible CO alarm activation, and operational and alarm status indications for the PSAX 1000 chassis.

Figure 2-21. PSAX 1000 Fan/Alarm Module

The PSAX 4500 Alarm module (see Figure 2-22) provides two connectors that allow for connections with external facility sensor inputs (doors, temperature, and so on), chassis alarm outputs (visible and audible), external device controls (cooling, heating, doors, and so on), and audible alarm cutoff controls (see Figure 2-23). In addition, the CPUn module generates trap messages that reflect state changes of the PSAX 4500 Alarm module’s sensor inputs, control outputs, and alarm cutoff control.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-42 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

JOR

ALARM

STATUS/CONTROL

Figure 2-22. PSAX 4500 Alarm Module

Critical Major Minor

CO Alarms

Alarms

ALARM

Fan

Output

Temp. Sensor

STATUS/CONTROL

Hot

Input

Cold

Figure 2-23. Example Configuration with the PSAX 4500 Alarm Module

The PSAX 4500 Alarm module is functionally identical to the Alarm module (model 20N79), but the module is designed to be mounted only in the rear panel (slot

14) of the PSAX 4500 chassis. This enables you to make maximum

use of the front panel I/O slots. The module uses midplane bus traces that do not impact midplane bus utilization calculations.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-43

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Like all of the other PSAX modules, the PSAX 4500 Alarm module is monitored and controlled through the console or EMS-PSAX. For a detailed description of the PSAX 4500 Alarm module, see the PacketStar Alarm Module User Guide.

PSAX 4500

Generating Central Office Alarms

COs and remote switch rooms have alarm panels with bells and lights that report on the status of the equipment in the facility. The module provides an interface with these alarm panels by generating alarms that indicate the chassis has failed in some fashion.

Alarms are generated from several sources from within the chassis and reported to the CPUn module. Upon receipt of an alarm, the CPUn module sends a status message to the module, which generates the appropriate alarm, depending on the severity of the alarm (see “Alarm Outputs” on page 2-45). The module then alerts the technician of the problem through

the alarm panels and sends a trap message to the NOC (see PacketStar

PSAX

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Trap Reference Guide).

Figure 2-24 provides an example of a sequence of events that would cause the module to generate an alarm:

1. The Stratum 3–4 module fails and a minor alarm message is sent to the module.

2. The module

MINOR alarm LED and CO Minor alarm lamp light, and the

Minor alarm bell rings.

3. The technician locates the malfunctioning system and presses the mod-

ACO switch or remote CO ACO device to silence the audible alarm.

ule’s

4. The technician replaces the Stratum 3–4 module and resets the audible alarm by pressing the module ACO switch or the CO ACO device.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-44 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

MINOR

CRITICAL

MAJOR

Stratum module fails and a minor alarm

command is sent to the Alarm Module.

Technician locates malfunctioning system

and presses module ACO switch or remote

CO ACO switch to disable.

Technician replaces Stratum module

and resets audible alarm by pressing the

module ACO switch.

Bell

ALARM CONNECTOR

Alarm module MINOR alarm LED and CO

Minor alarm lamp light, and alarm bell rings

when the relay is energized.

Minor

Visible

Figure 2-24. Generating Central Office Alarms (Example)

PSAX

3 Relays for Audible Alarms Critical Major Minor 3 Relays for Visible Alarms Critical Major Minor 1 Relay for Remote Alarm Cutoff

Relay

Ground

Common

Alarm Outputs Alarm Severity Levels

The Alarm, PSAX 4500 Alarm, and Fan/Alarm modules provide three severity levels of alarms—Critical, Major, and Minor—as reported by the following devices:

The Alarm module provides three severity levels of alarms—Critical, Major, and Minor—as reported by the LEDs on the module faceplate and through relay contact closures to activate external audible and visible devices in the CO or NOC. The PSAX 4500 Alarm module provides three severity levels of alarms—Critical, Major, and Minor—as reported by the LEDs on the module faceplate, chassis front panel, and through relay contact closures to activate external audible and visible devices in the CO or NOC. Visible alarms assist in identifying and locating the particular chassis that is in an alarm condition by activating the equipment bay alarm lights and chassis alarm indicators. Audible alarms also occur when an alarm condition exists in the CO or switch room.

Alarms reported at each of the three severity levels—Critical, Major, and Minor—are interdependent. If a higher severity alarm condition occurs (such as Critical—during the presence of a lower severity alarm (such as Minor), the Critical alarms (LEDs, visible, and audible) are activated and the Minor alarms are temporarily deactivated. Once the condition causing the higher severity alarm is cleared, the Critical alarms are deactivated, or cleared, and the Minor alarms are reactivated (if applicable).

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-45

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Output Generation Criteria

The generated Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm module alarms described in Table 2-18 occur under the following conditions:

Table 2-18. Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm Module Alarm Generation Criteria

This Alarm occurs… Under the following conditions…

CRITICAL • Loss of input power to the chassis—all module LEDs do not illuminate but

a Critical alarm is generated when the alarm relay becomes unpowered and causes the relay contacts to change position

• Failure of both CPUn modules

• Loss or Failure of both Stratum 3–4 modules

MAJOR • Loss of both BITS clocks

• Loss of both Composite clocks

• Loss of both primary and secondary I/O timing references (if provisioned)

MINOR • Failure of one -48 V dc Power Supply module (including fan)

• Loss of one BITS or Composite clock timing reference source

• Failure of one Stratum 3–4 module in a redundant configuration

• Failure of one CPUn module in a redundant configuration

• Failure of one configured module

• Loss of signal or frame from a primary or secondary timing source when

line timing is configured on the Stratum 3–4 module

The generated Fan/Alarm module alarms described in Table 2-19 occur under the following conditions:

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-46 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

Table 2-19. Fan/Alarm Module Alarm Generation Criteria

This Alarm occurs… Under the following conditions…

CRITICAL • Loss of input power to the chassis—all module LEDs do not illuminate

but a Critical alarm is generated when the alarm relay becomes unpowered and cause the relay contacts to change position

• Failure of one fan in the Fan/Alarm module

• Failure of the Fan/Alarm module (system fails due to overheating)

• Failure of both CPUn modules

MAJOR • Loss of both BITS clocks

• Loss of both Composite Clocks

• Loss of both primary and secondary I/O timing references (if provisioned)

MINOR • Failure of one Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module, Stratum 3–4

component

• Failure of one Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module, power supply

component

• Failure of one configured module

• Loss of one clock input to the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module,

Stratum 3–4 component

• Loss of signal or frame from a primary or secondary timing source when

line timing is configured on the Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module, Stratum 3–4 component

Alarm Relay Operation

When more than one of the above conditions occurs in more than one category, the highest severity alarm determines which LED illuminates.

Note: For the Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm modules, output contact clo-

sures are not supported for a non-redundant Stratum 3–4 module configuration as this results in a permanent Minor alarm. For the Fan/Alarm module, output contact closures are not supported for a non-redundant Stratum 3–4/Power Supply module configuration as this results in a permanent Minor alarm.

For the Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm modules, the activation of the external alarms in the CO is controlled through six relays (three for visible alarms and three for audible alarms) with Form 1-C contacts (see Figure 2-25). The contacts—normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common (COM)—are accessible through the

ALARM connector.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-47

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

COM

9 10

ALARM Connector 26-pin

COM

Audible Alarm Critical (Normally Energized No Alarm)

Audible Alarm Major

Audible Alarm Minor

Visible Alarm Critical (Normally Energized No Alarm)

Visible Alarm Major

Visible Alarm Minor

-OR-

COM

Audible Alarm Critical (Power Lost Alarm Generated)

COM

Visible Alarm Critical (Power Lost Alarm Generated)

+BAT RTN

Vdc

Remote Alarm Cutoff

-BAT (-48Vdc)

GND

22 23

+BAT RTN

Not Used

NO - Normally Open NC - Normally Closed COM - Common BAT RTN - Battery Return

Figure 2-25. Alarm and PSAX 4500 Alarm Module ALARM Connector

Configuration

For the Fan/Alarm module, the activation of the external alarms in the CO is controlled through six relays (three for visible alarms and three for audible alarms) with Form 1-C contacts (see Figure 2-26). The contacts—normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common (COM)—are accessible through the

ALARM connector.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-48 255-700-686R10.0.0

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

ALARM Connector 26-pin

COM

Audible Alarm Critical (Normally Energized No Alarm)

Audible Alarm Major

Audible Alarm Minor

Visible Alarm Critical (Normally Energized No Alarm)

Visible Alarm Major

Visible Alarm Minor

-OR-

COM

Audible Alarm Critical (Power Lost Alarm Generated)

COM

Visible Alarm Critical (Power Lost Alarm Generated)

Vdc

Remote Alarm Cutoff

-BAT (-48Vdc)

+BAT RTN

NO - Normally Open NC - Normally Closed COM - Common BAT RTN - Battery Return

Figure 2-26. Fan/Alarm Module ALARM Connector Configuration

To allow flexibility in connecting the module to the external alarm panel:

• The Major and Minor alarm relays are energized only when an appropriate

alarm condition occurs.

• The Critical alarm relays are normally energized when no alarms are

reported. When a Critical alarm is reported or power fails, the relays are de-energized, causing contacts to change positions and in turn causing the CO alarms to be activated.

Figure 2-27 illustrates how the Alarm modules might be connected to a CO alarm panel.

• Diagram A shows an unalarmed condition.

• Diagram B shows an alarmed condition.

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

255-700-686R10.0.0 2-49

Chapter 2 Hardware Description

Common Equipment Modules

No Alarms

Critical Major Minor

Alarm Panel

Major Alarm Generated

Critical

Alarm Panel

Major

Minor

Alarms

PSAX Alarm Module

COM

PSAX Alarm Module

COM

Major Alarm Visible

Major Alarm Generated

Audible Alarm Cutoff (ACO)

NO - Normally Open NC - Normally Closed COM - Common

Figure 2-27. Generating Alarms

The alarm cutoff (ACO) function provides a method of silencing the audible alarms caused by an alarm condition being reported by the chassis; it has no effect on the visible alarms activated by the module. The alarm cutoff is controlled through the device (connected through the

ACO switch on the module and from a remote ACO

ALARM connector). A remote ACO device

could be a switch, relay contacts, or software command.

When an audible alarm occurs, pressing the module ACO switch or activating the remote ACO device once performs the following functions:

• Silences the audible alarms, but does not clear the alarm condition

• Illuminates the yellow

ACO LED on the module

• Reports the change in state to the CPUn module

Pressing the module

ACO switch or deactivating the remote ACO device a

second time performs the following functions:

• Reestablishes the audible alarm functionality

• Extinguishes the yellow

ACO LED on the module

PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide, Issue 1 Release 10.0.0

2-50 255-700-686R10.0.0

Lucent Technologies PSAX 1000, PSAX 1250, PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

Copyright

Trademarks

Notices

Warranty Information

Regulatory Standards Compliance

Safety Information

Table of Contents

List of Figures

List of Tables

Purpose of This Guide

1 Getting Started

Audience for This Guide

What You Should Know

Related Reading

Product Information Library

Printed Documents

Other Publications

Conventions

Text Types Used in This Document

Table 1-1. Text Conventions

Icons and Symbols

Command Description Tables

Table 1-2. Command Description Table Example

Field Description Tables

Figure 1-1. Field Description Table Example

Selecting Options, Fields, and Commands

Table 1-3. System Responses to Selecting Options, Fields, or Commands

Help Information

Table 1-4. Shortcut Keys for Navigating Console Interface Windows

Figure 1-2. Main Menu Help Window

Technical Support

About Lucent Technologies

History

For More Information

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family

Comments on This Guide

2 Hardware Description

Overview of This Chapter

System Features

System Hardware Components

Figure 2-1. PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

Chassis Hardware

Module Slot Locations

Figure 2-2. Front View of the PSAX 1000 Chassis

Figure 2-3. Rear View of the PSAX 1000 Chassis

Midplane

Blank Faceplates

Chassis Specifications

Table 2-1. PSAX 1000 Chassis Hardware Specifications

System Environmental Specifications

Table 2-2. PSAX 1000 System Environmental Specifications

System Features

System Hardware Components

Figure 2-4. PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway(19-in.)

Figure 2-5. PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway (23-in.)

Chassis Hardware

Module Slot Locations

Backplane

Figure 2-6. PSAX 1250 48.26-cm (19-in.) Chassis Backplane

Figure 2-7. PSAX 1250 58.42-cm (23-in.) Chassis Backplane

Chassis Specifications

Table 2-3. PSAX 1250 Chassis Hardware Specifications

System Environmental Specifications

Table 2-4. PSAX 1250 System Environmental Specifications

System Features

System Hardware Components

Figure 2-8. PacketStar PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

Chassis Hardware

Module Slot Locations

Backplane

Chassis Specifications

Table 2-5. PSAX 2300 Chassis Hardware Specifications

System Environmental Specifications

Table 2-6. PSAX 2300 System Environmental Specifications

System Features

System Hardware Components